HP Designjet Color 3D Printer (Service Manual) PDF

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 458
At a glance
Powered by AI
The document provides an overview and instructions for using a 3D printer service guide. It covers safety information, powering on/off procedures, loading materials, and building parts.

The electronics overview section discusses the single board computer, controller board, voltage generation, dual port memory interface, and axis control components.

The tm command monitors temperatures for the model liquefier, support liquefier, and chamber heater. It is used to troubleshoot temperature issues.

HP Designjet 3D

HP Designjet Color 3D

Service Guide

Legal Notice
The information contained herein is subject
to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP Products and

Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered


trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
.

services are set forth in the express warranty


statement accompanying such products and
services. Nothing herein should be
construed as constituting an additional
warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical
or editorial errors or omissions contained
herein.
2012 Hewlett-Packard Development
Company, L.P.
Rev. C

Conforms to ANSI/UL std. 60950-1-2003


Certified to CAN/CSA C22.2 no. 60950-1-03
HP Designjet 3D and HP Designjet Color 3D
conform with the following standards, in accordance with the
EU Machinery, Low Voltage and Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directives: EU 98/37/EEC, EU 73/23/EEC
amended by 93/68/EEC, EU 89/336/EEC

-3

Table of Contents
Introduction .....................................................................................................1
How to use this guide ...................................................................................................... 1
Safety............................................................................................................................ 2

Overview .........................................................................................................3
What happens when... ........................................................................................... 3
Powering up: ......................................................................................................... 3
Powering Down ..................................................................................................... 4
Loading Material.................................................................................................... 4
Building a Part ....................................................................................................... 4
Electronics Overview .............................................................................................. 6
Single Board Computer........................................................................................... 7
Controller Board .................................................................................................... 8
Overview .............................................................................................................. 8
Voltage Generation ................................................................................................ 8
Dual Port Memory Interface ..................................................................................... 8
X, Y, Z Axis Control................................................................................................ 8
Material Motor Control ........................................................................................... 8
Temperature Control ............................................................................................... 8
Liquefier Temperature Control .................................................................................. 9
Actuators, Switches & Optical Sensors ...................................................................... 9
Safety Devices ..................................................................................................... 10
Controller Board Layout ........................................................................................ 10
Reset Button ......................................................................................................... 11
Dip Switches........................................................................................................ 11
SW2 .................................................................................................................. 12
SW5 .................................................................................................................. 12
SW6 .................................................................................................................. 12
Memory .............................................................................................................. 12
LEDs ................................................................................................................... 12
Power Distribution Board (PDB) .............................................................................. 14
Chamber Temperature Control ............................................................................... 15
Test Points and LEDs ............................................................................................ 16
I/O Card ............................................................................................................ 18
Head Board ........................................................................................................ 19
Printer overview ................................................................................................... 20

Setup ............................................................................................................25
Installing software ......................................................................................................... 25
Installing HP Designjet 3D Software Solution:...................................................... 25
Installing firmware to the workstation: ................................................................ 25
Networking the printer................................................................................................... 25
Connecting through a network: ......................................................................... 25
Connecting directly to a workstation: ................................................................. 25
Establishing network communication with the printer ......................................................... 26
Establishing communication on a dynamic network: ............................................ 26
Establishing communication on a static network: ................................................. 27
Setting the static network in Windows XP: .......................................................... 27
Setting the static network in Windows Vista: ....................................................... 27
Setting the static network in Windows 7:............................................................ 28
Setting the static network on printer: .................................................................. 28
Establish communication: ................................................................................. 29
Installing Firmware on printer ......................................................................................... 30
Adding the second HP Designjet 3D Material Bay............................................................. 31
Installing the HP Designjet 3D Material Bay: ....................................................... 31

Operation ......................................................................................................37
Display panel and keypad ............................................................................................. 37
System firmware overview.............................................................................................. 38
HP Designjet 3D Software Solution overview .................................................................... 39
Processing your STL file for printing ................................................................................. 40
Opening your STL file with HP Designjet 3D Software Solution:............................. 40
Selecting layer resolution:................................................................................. 40
Selecting model interior fill style: ....................................................................... 40
Selecting support style:..................................................................................... 41
Selecting the scale of your STL file: .................................................................... 41
Selecting the orientation of your STL file: ............................................................ 41
Adding your STL file to the pack:....................................................................... 42
Printing your STL file: ....................................................................................... 42
Building a part ............................................................................................................. 43
Starting a build from a remote location: ............................................................. 43
Starting a build from the display panel:.............................................................. 43
The display panel during build ....................................................................................... 44
Chamber Lights............................................................................................................. 44
Pausing a build............................................................................................................. 45
Resuming after pause .................................................................................................... 45
Canceling a build ......................................................................................................... 45

Removing a completed part............................................................................................ 46


Remove a part from the modeling base: ............................................................. 46
Removing support material ............................................................................................. 46
Emptying the purge bucket ............................................................................................. 47
Replacing material for single material bay ....................................................................... 47
Replacing material for dual material bays ........................................................................ 48
Material bay LEDs......................................................................................................... 49
Replacing material spools .............................................................................................. 50
Removing a spool of material from the carrier:.................................................... 50
Storing material spools .................................................................................................. 50
Auto power down ......................................................................................................... 52
Cancelling auto power down:........................................................................... 52
Powering off................................................................................................................. 53
Resuming operations from Standby mode ........................................................................ 53
Updating printer firmware:............................................................................................. 53
Installing the firmware:..................................................................................... 53

Software ........................................................................................................55
Software Architecture .................................................................................................... 55
Operating System ......................................................................................................... 55
Display Driver .............................................................................................................. 55
Comm Server ............................................................................................................... 56
System Manager........................................................................................................... 56
Move Compiler............................................................................................................. 56
Feeder......................................................................................................................... 56
Event/Command Monitor............................................................................................... 56
HP Designjet 3D Software Solution Help .......................................................................... 57
HP Designjet 3D Software Solution overview ........................................................... 57
Conventional help file ........................................................................................... 57
Dynamic help ...................................................................................................... 57

Maintenance ..................................................................................................59
Startup kit tools ............................................................................................................. 59
Preventive Maintenance ................................................................................................. 59
Daily .................................................................................................................. 59
Empty the purge bucket.................................................................................... 59
Inspect the tip wipe assembly............................................................................ 59
Inspect the tip shields ....................................................................................... 59
Remove debris buildup..................................................................................... 59
Vacuum build chamber .................................................................................... 59
Clean door..................................................................................................... 59

500 Hour maintenance.................................................................................................. 60


Tip wipe assembly................................................................................................ 60
Tip shield replacement .......................................................................................... 62
Remove debris from the Filament Present switch ....................................................... 64
2000 Hour maintenance................................................................................................ 66
Tip replacement and calibration............................................................................. 66
Removing tips: ................................................................................................ 66
Installing tips:.................................................................................................. 68
Tip calibration: ............................................................................................... 71
Chamber light bar replacement.............................................................................. 73

Troubleshooting .............................................................................................75
User Troubleshooting..................................................................................................... 75
Fault determination codes...................................................................................... 77
Cycling power ..................................................................................................... 78
Diagnosing loss of extrusion .................................................................................. 78
Clogged tip ......................................................................................................... 79
Material Jam........................................................................................................ 80
Recovering from loss of extrusion ........................................................................... 82
Service Troubleshooting ................................................................................................. 86
1.0 How to use this Guide .................................................................................... 86
2.0 Special Notes ................................................................................................ 87
3.0 Code Errors ................................................................................................... 88
Major Codes with Minor Codes ............................................................................. 90
4.0 Non-Code Errors .......................................................................................... 107
What happens during Power Up / Boot................................................................ 119
5.0 Connector Pinouts and Signals....................................................................... 129
Umbilical cable diagram ..................................................................................... 129
Umbilical cable pinouts....................................................................................... 129
Upper harness ................................................................................................... 131
Upper harness pinouts ........................................................................................ 132
Lower harness.................................................................................................... 133
Lower harness pinouts......................................................................................... 133
Part Quality Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 135
Embedded support strands in model ..................................................................... 135
Brown streaks (burn marks).................................................................................. 136
Loss of Extrusion (LOE) ........................................................................................ 137
Model embedded in to support ............................................................................ 139
Moisture in material............................................................................................ 140
Open seams ...................................................................................................... 141

Part curling ........................................................................................................ 142


Part fell over ...................................................................................................... 143
Part shifting ....................................................................................................... 144
Rough surface quality ......................................................................................... 146
Rough quality all over ......................................................................................... 147
Model strands on parts ....................................................................................... 148
Witness marks ................................................................................................... 149
Wavy surface .................................................................................................... 150
Wavy parts ....................................................................................................... 151
Under fill ........................................................................................................... 152
Material sagging on curved parts......................................................................... 153
Fused layers ...................................................................................................... 154
Z layers inconsistent ........................................................................................... 155

Removal and Installation ..............................................................................157


Maintenance Preparation............................................................................................. 159
Tools needed for repair not order-able as a service part.......................................... 160
Tools needed for repair that are order-able as a service part ................................... 160
Pre-Maintenance Procedures ................................................................................ 160
Exterior Components ................................................................................................... 161
Top Panel.......................................................................................................... 161
Removing the top panel ................................................................................. 161
Installing the top panel................................................................................... 162
Side Panels........................................................................................................ 162
Removing the side panels ............................................................................... 162
Removing the right side panel: ........................................................................ 164
Installing the side panels ................................................................................ 164
Display Panel..................................................................................................... 165
Removing the display panel............................................................................ 165
Installing the display panel ............................................................................. 166
Front Panel ........................................................................................................ 166
Removing the front panel................................................................................ 166
Installing the front panel ................................................................................. 168
Door Solenoid ................................................................................................... 168
Removing the door solenoid ........................................................................... 168
Installing the door solenoid............................................................................. 169
Door Sensor ...................................................................................................... 169
Removing the door sensor .............................................................................. 169
Installing the door sensor................................................................................ 170
Electronics Bay Components......................................................................................... 171

Lower Electronics Bay Cover ................................................................................ 171


Opening the electronics bay ........................................................................... 171
Closing the electronics bay............................................................................. 172
Upper Electronics Bay Cover ............................................................................... 173
Removing the upper electronics bay cover ........................................................ 173
Installing the upper electronics bay cover ......................................................... 174
Removing the Electronics Bay............................................................................... 175
Removing the electronics bay.......................................................................... 175
Installing the electronics bay ........................................................................... 176
Electronics Bay Cooling Fan ................................................................................ 177
Removing the electronics bay cooling fan ......................................................... 177
Installing the electronics bay cooling fan .......................................................... 178
Controller Board ................................................................................................ 179
Removing the controller board ........................................................................ 179
Installing the controller board.......................................................................... 181
Single Board Computer (SBC) .............................................................................. 182
Removing the single board computer ............................................................... 182
Reinstalling the single board computer ............................................................. 184
Power Distribution I/O Card................................................................................ 184
Removing the I/O card .................................................................................. 185
Installing the I/O card ................................................................................... 186
Power Distribution Board (PDB) ............................................................................ 187
Removing the power distribution board ............................................................ 187
Installing the power distribution board ............................................................. 190
Hard Drive ........................................................................................................ 191
Removing the hard drive ................................................................................ 191
Installing the hard drive.................................................................................. 193
Line Filter........................................................................................................... 194
Removing the line filter................................................................................... 194
Installing the line filter .................................................................................... 195
Circuit Breaker................................................................................................... 196
Removing the circuit breaker........................................................................... 196
Installing the circuit breaker ............................................................................ 197
AC Input ........................................................................................................... 197
Removing the AC Input .................................................................................. 198
Installing the AC Input.................................................................................... 198
Power Switch ..................................................................................................... 199
Removing the Power Switch ............................................................................ 199
Installing the power switch.............................................................................. 200

24VDC Power Supply ......................................................................................... 201


Removing the 24VDC Power Supply ................................................................ 201
Installing the 24VDC power supply.................................................................. 204
5/12VDC Power Supply ..................................................................................... 205
Removing the 5/12VDC power supply ............................................................ 205
Installing the 5/12VDC power supply.............................................................. 207
120VDC Power Supply ....................................................................................... 208
Removing the 120VDC power supply .............................................................. 208
Installing the 120 VDC power supply............................................................... 209
Head Components ...................................................................................................... 210
Head Cooling Fan.............................................................................................. 210
Removing the head cooling fan....................................................................... 210
Installing the Head Cooling fan....................................................................... 211
Toggle Head Assembly ....................................................................................... 212
Removing the toggle head assembly ................................................................ 212
Installing the toggle head assembly ................................................................. 217
Substrate Sensor ................................................................................................ 220
Removing the substrate sensor......................................................................... 220
Installing the substrate sensor .......................................................................... 222
Z Foam Level Assembly ....................................................................................... 223
Removing the Z Foam Level Assembly: ............................................................. 223
Installing the Z Foam Level Assembly: .............................................................. 224
Toggle Sensor.................................................................................................... 225
Removing the toggle sensor ............................................................................ 225
Installing the toggle sensor ............................................................................. 226
Toggle Bar ........................................................................................................ 227
Removing the toggle bar: ............................................................................... 228
Installing the toggle bar:................................................................................. 232
Head Board ...................................................................................................... 233
Removing the head board .............................................................................. 233
Installing the head board ............................................................................... 238
TC Amp board................................................................................................... 239
Removing the TC Amp board.......................................................................... 239
Installing the TC Amp board ........................................................................... 241
Umbilical Hose .................................................................................................. 241
Removing the umbilical hose........................................................................... 241
Installing the umbilical hose ............................................................................ 245
Material Tubes ................................................................................................... 246
Removing the material tubes ........................................................................... 246

Installing the material tubes ............................................................................ 246


Umbilical Cable ................................................................................................. 247
Removing the umbilical cable ......................................................................... 247
Installing the umbilical cable ........................................................................... 248
XY Table Components ................................................................................................. 249
Y Home Sensor .................................................................................................. 249
Removing the Y home sensor .......................................................................... 249
Installing the Y Home Sensor........................................................................... 250
Y EOT (End of Travel) Sensor ............................................................................... 250
Removing the Y EOT sensor ............................................................................ 250
Installing the Y EOT Sensor............................................................................. 251
X Motor ............................................................................................................ 252
Removing the X motor .................................................................................... 252
Installing the X motor ..................................................................................... 256
Y Motor ............................................................................................................ 260
Removing the Y motor .................................................................................... 260
Installing the Y motor ..................................................................................... 262
Y Motor Belt ...................................................................................................... 263
Removing the Y Motor Belt ............................................................................. 263
Installing the Y Motor Belt............................................................................... 271
Y Drive Rod ....................................................................................................... 272
Removing the Y Drive Rod .............................................................................. 272
XY Table ........................................................................................................... 281
Removing the XY table ................................................................................... 282
Installing the XY table .................................................................................... 291
Z Stage Components ................................................................................................... 304
Z Home Sensor .................................................................................................. 304
Removing the Z home sensor .......................................................................... 304
Installing the Z home sensor............................................................................ 305
Z EOT (End of Travel) Sensor ............................................................................... 305
Removing the Z EOT sensor ............................................................................ 305
Installing the Z EOT sensor ............................................................................. 306
Chamber Fans ................................................................................................... 307
Removing the right side chamber fan ............................................................... 307
Installing the right side chamber fan ................................................................ 308
Removing the left side chamber fan ................................................................. 308
Installing the left side chamber fan................................................................... 309
Chamber Heaters ............................................................................................... 310
Removing the right side heater ........................................................................ 310

Installing the right side heater ......................................................................... 312


Removing the left side heater .......................................................................... 312
Installing the left side heater............................................................................ 314
Thermal Fuses .................................................................................................... 315
Removing the right side thermal fuse ................................................................ 315
Installing the right side thermal fuse ................................................................. 316
Removing the left side thermal fuse .................................................................. 317
Installing the left side thermal fuse ................................................................... 318
Chamber Thermocouple ...................................................................................... 319
Removing the chamber thermocouple............................................................... 319
Installing the chamber thermocouple ................................................................ 319
Z Motor ............................................................................................................ 321
Removing the Z motor .................................................................................... 321
Installing the Z motor ..................................................................................... 324
Z Stage............................................................................................................. 325
Removing the Z stage .................................................................................... 326
Installing the Z stage...................................................................................... 327

Service Calibrations & Adjustments ...............................................................337


Offset Calibrations ...................................................................................................... 338
Adjusting Z Calibration and XY Tip Offset ........................................................ 338
Z Calibration ................................................................................................ 338
Entering Z Calibration values manually (Firmware version 9.1 or newer).............. 338
Z tip to base (ZT2B)....................................................................................... 338
Z tip to tip (ZT2T) .......................................................................................... 339
XY Tip Calibration ......................................................................................... 340
Entering XY Tip Calibration values manually (Firmware version 9.1 or newer)....... 341
Part Based Calibration................................................................................................. 343
When to Perform Part Based calibration........................................................... 343
Performing part based calibration for HP Designjet 3D from the Service Calibration
menu (Firmware version 9.1 or newer)............................................................. 343
Performing part based calibration for HP Designjet 3D with the HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software ............................................................................................. 352
Part Measurement Equations ........................................................................... 359
Performing part based calibration for HP Designjet Color 3D from the Service Calibration menu (Firmware version 9.1 or newer)....................................................... 360
Performing part based calibration for HP Designjet Color 3D with the HP Designjet Diagnostics Software ........................................................................................ 371
Part Measurement Equations ........................................................................... 380
Tensioning the X & Y Drive Belts ................................................................................... 381
Zero the Dial Indicator ................................................................................... 381
Checking/Adjusting the X-Drive Belt Tension..................................................... 382

Checking/Adjusting the Y-Drive Belt Tension..................................................... 384


Get/Send Calibration Files .......................................................................................... 386
Get Calibration.................................................................................................. 386
Send Calibration................................................................................................ 386
When this button is pressed a dialog box appears that allows you to browse for and select
the calibration file to send to the printer. ............................................................... 386
XY Table Leveling........................................................................................................ 386
Checking the XY Table Level ........................................................................... 386
Adjusting the XY Table Level ........................................................................... 390
Head Alignment Procedure .......................................................................................... 392
Drive Wheel Alignment .................................................................................. 392
Idler Wheel Check/Adjustment ....................................................................... 395
Liquefier Alignment........................................................................................ 397
Verify Liquefier Alignment............................................................................... 398
Complete the Re-Assembly of the Toggle Head Assembly ................................... 401
Tip wipe assembly.............................................................................................. 402
Adjusting tip wipe assembly height:................................................................. 402

Appendix ....................................................................................................405
Appendix Overview .................................................................................................... 405
Front door area components......................................................................................... 406
Electronics bay components ......................................................................................... 407
Head area components ............................................................................................... 409
XY Table area components........................................................................................... 413
Z Stage area components ............................................................................................ 415
Chamber heater area components ................................................................................ 416
Cables....................................................................................................................... 417
Material Bay Components............................................................................................ 418
Tools ......................................................................................................................... 419
Consumables.............................................................................................................. 419
Hard Drive Installation Checklist ................................................................................... 420
Toggle Head Assembly Installation Checklist .................................................................. 421
XY Table Assembly Installation Checklist ........................................................................ 422
Controller Board Checklist............................................................................................ 423
HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software Help .................................................................... 424
Overview .......................................................................................................... 424
Select a Modeler................................................................................................ 424
Modeler States................................................................................................... 425
Modeler Setup ................................................................................................... 425
Display Units ..................................................................................................... 425
Printer Status...................................................................................................... 425

Position and Temperatures................................................................................... 426


Versions ............................................................................................................ 426
Travel Limits....................................................................................................... 426
Material ............................................................................................................ 427
Door................................................................................................................. 427
Setting the Serial Number ................................................................................... 427
Materials........................................................................................................... 427
Adjusting XY Tip Offset ....................................................................................... 427
Gantry .............................................................................................................. 428
Temperatures ..................................................................................................... 428
Temperature Limits.............................................................................................. 428
Outputs ............................................................................................................. 429
Get Calibration.................................................................................................. 429
Send Calibration................................................................................................ 430
Get Configuration .............................................................................................. 430
Test Parts........................................................................................................... 430
Reset Password .................................................................................................. 430
Connect ............................................................................................................ 430
Tera Term .................................................................................................................. 431
Using Tera Term................................................................................................. 431
Connecting with Tera Term .................................................................................. 431
Tera Term Commands ......................................................................................... 434

-12

Introduction
HP Designjet 3D and HP Designjet Color 3D are designed with
ultimate simplicity in mind. The printer enables you to build parts
quickly and easily, even if youve never used a 3D printer before.
The printers build models with ABSplusTM material so parts are
strong and durable. ABSplus material also ensures you will be
able to drill, tap, sand and paint your creations. With Soluble
Support Technology (SST), your completed parts are quickly
available for review and test. Designjet 3D and Designjet Color
3D are an innovative combination of proprietary hardware,
software and material technology.

Welcome to the new dimension of 3D modeling!

How to use this guide


This User Guide is laid out in easy to follow sections which cover
Set-up, Operation, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting. Read each
section carefully so that you will get the best performance from
your printer.

Throughout this User Guide, text representing Interface Messages


that appear on the display panel are presented in a bold font.

-1

Safety
The following classifications are used throughout this guide.
CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, could result in serious injury.
Hot Surface: The hot surface sign indicates the presence of devices
with high temperatures. Always use extra care, and wear safety
gloves, when working around heated components
GLOVES: When performing some maintenance procedures, the
machine may be hot and gloves will be required to avoid burns.
SAFETY GLASSES: Wear safety glasses to avoid injury to your
eyes.
LIFTING HAZARD: Hazard: Lift with two or more people to avoid
serious injury.
RECYCLE: Use proper recycling techniques for materials and packaging.
ESD: Use standard electrostatic discharge (ESD)
precautions when working on or near electrical
components.

-2

What happens when...


Powering up:

Overview

Power Switch turned to ON


Chamber lights (dim mode), display backlight
and fans turn on. Material bay drive homes.
Controller
Performs Power On Self Test (POST).
POST looks at voltages, checksum
and memory, etc.
Performs basic hardware setup such
as checks for number of material
bays and loads gantry parameters,
etc.

Once printer software is loaded to


RAM the controller runs the POST
test again.

SBC
BIOS starts and loads the OS
(operating system) from the
hard drive to the SBC RAM.
OS boots - performs check
disk (chkdsk) and loads Linux
OS from hard drive to RAM.
After chkdsk is complete,
Copyright screen will
be displayed.
Loads printer software from
hard drive to RAM. SBC send
second reset (in) command to
controller.
Starting Up
Initializing is
displayed.

Controller receives updated


parameters from SBC.

Loads parameters to controller


(Coldfire chip) (e.g. extrusion
parameters).

Power enabled to the XYZ motors, via


the XP command.

SBC enables power to XYZ


motors
Starting Up
Calibrating is
displayed

Chamber lights on (full power)


Load globals
Door locks
Performs Calibrate (home) sequence:
1. Moves
sensor
2. Moves
sor
3. Moves
sor
4. Moves

Z stage down to Z EOT

Calibrate (home) by issuing


move commands to the
controller

head to X home (BOT) senhead to Y home (BOT) senhead to Y EOT sensor

Head and chamber heaters begin to


heat up, via the th, tr and tx
commands

Commands head and chamber to


heat to Idle temperature (sets
temperatures)
Idle is
displayed

-3

Once the unit is ready to build, the display will show Idle (no part in the
queue) or Ready to build followed by the part name. Once a part is started
the appropriate liquefier will begin to heat. Once the liquefier and chamber
reach the operating temperature (310C model, 300C support, 77 Chamber)
the system will begin to build a part.

Powering Down
When the Power Switch is turned off the unit begins a controlled shut down.
The software processes are stopped and the power to the liquefier and
chamber heaters are turned off. The controller board continues to monitor
the temperature of the liquefier and the fans will continue to run. During this
time the display will show Shutting down. The head blower fan continues
to run to cool the liquefier down quickly to prevent back flow of material from
the liquefier. If the material is not cooled down during power down the
system may experience a loss of extrusion due to material build up at the
liquefier. Once the liquefier temperature drops below 102 C the SBC
changes the display to Shut down and turns off.

Loading Material
When the load material button is pressed with carriers installed the SBC will
ask the controller board to unload the carriers requested by the operator.
The most recent value for material remaining is written to the cartridge
EPROM. The material is run in reverse to unload the liquefier. When filament
is clear of the filament sensor the controller board tells the SBC that the
command is complete. The SBC sends REMOVE CARRIER to the
display, the carriers are unlatched, and the unit waits for you to respond.
If there are no carriers in the printer when the material button is pushed, or if
an unload has just been completed, the SBC will ask the operator to
INSERT CARRIER. The unit will look for a valid carrier EPROM. If there
is no change to the EPROM status in 30 seconds, you are asked if you want
to RETRY. Once valid carriers are read, the unit begins the material load
sequence.

Building a Part
How to start building a part build is dependent upon whether or not a part
is in the printer queue:
1.

If a part has not been sent to the printer for building (the build queue is
empty):
A. The panel displays Idle and Queue Empty.
B. Wait for Part is blinking. Choose whether you want to start
the build process from a remote location or from the
display panel at the printer.
i. At Printer Start Model - You send a part to the printer
from your HP Designjet 3D Software Solution work station.
You start the build of the part from the printer.

-4

a. Do not press the Wait for Part button


b. From your HP Designjet 3D Software Solution work
station, send a part to the printer.
c. The printer panel displays the name of the first
model in the printer queue and Start Model is
blinking.
d. From the printer, press the Start Model button to
begin building the displayed part.
ii.

Remote Start Model: - You send a part to the printer


from your HP Designjet 3D Software Solution work
station. The part automatically begins to build.
a. From the printer, press the Wait for Part button

Note: Make sure an empty modeling base is installed, then answer


Yes to the prompt Is Model Base Installed?
b. Wait for Part is displayed in the upper window.
Press Cancel if you wish to exit the remote start
mode.
c. From your HP Designjet 3D Software Solution work
station, send a part to the printer. The printer will
automatically start to build the model.
3. If a part has been sent to the printer for build (there is at least one part
in the build queue), but is not building:
A. The panel displays Ready to Build.
B. The name of the first model in the build queue is displayed.
C. Start Model is blinking. Press the Start Model button to
begin building the displayed part.
Regardless of the method used to start building a part, the printer will
perform the same sequence of steps:
1.

The printer drops (lowers) the substrate sensor.

2. System touches down six times which measures the height of the substrate.
3. SBC converts the model file (CMB) into the motion commands that the
controller will execute to build the model.
4. System completes substrate measurement.
5. Z stage moves to bottom of Z travel.
6. Head moves over the purge bucket and prepares to build purging the
appropriate tip.
7.

Once purge is complete, the printer will start to build the model.

During model construction, the printer will display the percentage of material
remaining on each spool. During building the keypad will allow you to
pause the printer, or turn on the chamber lights. The printer will stay in the
Building State until the model is finished or the printer pauses. If the printer
pauses, it will enter a Pending Pause state until the current road is finished.

-5

Once that road is complete, the head will move over the purge bucket, and
the Z stage will descend to the bottom of the envelope. In the Pause State the
printer can be resumed, material can be loaded and unloaded, the build
can be canceled, and printer maintenance may be performed.

Electronics Overview

I/O

Figure 1: Electronics Overview detail

Controller
Board

PDB

+24 VDC
power
supply

Support
heater
+120
VDC
power
supply

+5 and
+12 VDC
Power
Supply

120-240
VAC

SBC

AC Input

120-240
VAC in

-6

Single Board Computer


The single board computer (SBC) is the main processor in the system. See
(Figure ) showing the board layout.
The TCP/IP network interface connects directly to the RJ-45 connector on the
SBC. The network interface supports both 10baseT and 100baseT operation.
The hardware differentiates automatically. There are two LEDs at the RJ-45
connector. These show the status of the network connection as follows:

Green LED: Indicates there is a network connection present.


Amber LED: Indicates there is a network communication.

The Hard Disk Drive (HDD) connects to the SBC with a standard IDE
interface (ribbon cable). The HDD contains the Linux operating system and
all the control software needed to run the system (except the controller
firmware). This is also where all the downloaded models are stored in the
queue.
The LCD Control Panel connects to the I/O Card. The signals then travel
though the PDB and on to the SBC. All user entered commands from the
control panel buttons are routed through the I/O and PDB and then on to the
SBC.
The P104 connector on the top edge of the board is a bus level interface to
the controller board. This allows the SBC to read and write to the dual port
ram on the controller board, which forms the communication channel
between the two boards.
Figure 2: Single board computer detail

RJ-45
Network
Connector
SATA
Connector

Display Panel
DB-9
Connector

P104
Connector

J2 power
input

-7

Controller Board
Overview
The controller board provides all of the low level hardware control and
sensing for the system. The firmware runs on the controller CPU and is flash
resident (rather than on the HDD and SBC).

Voltage Generation

+/-15 VDC is used for PMD DACs

10 VDC is used for DAC reference

3.3 VDC is used for controller board logic

Dual Port Memory Interface


The dual port memory located on the controller board provides the
communication channel with the single board computer (SBC) through the
P104 connector. The SBC provides the coordinates, velocities, and flow rate
commands for modeling to the controller. The controller board provides the
status/error information about the hardware back to the SBC.

X, Y, Z Axis Control
The controller takes the flow rate information from the SBC and sends it to
the PMD processor. The PMD 2840 processor services the X and Y stepper
motors and the model and support head servo motors. The 3410 processor
services the Z axis stepper motor. There is no feedback from the stepper
motors to the system (they are open-loop controlled).

Material Motor Control


The controller takes the flow rate information from the SBC and sends it to
the PMD 2840 processors. The PMD uses this information along with the
encoder signals from the material motors to generate an output signal to
drive the servo motors in the head assembly. Since the encoders provide
feedback the material motors have a closed-loop control. Their position and
rotation are precisely known at all times.

Temperature Control
The controller board reads the three thermocouple (T/C) inputs/signals - 2
for the head, 1 for the chamber.

-8

Liquefier Temperature Control


The liquefier T/C connects to the controller board through the power
distribution board. The T/C generates a variable low level current that
depends on the temperature of the T/C. This analog signal from the T/C is
amplified by the head distribution. It is then sent down the umbilical cable to
the PDB, and then to the controller board. An A to D converter in the
ColdFire chip converts the analog signal to digital. In order to improve
temperature resolution, this signal is biased. The lowest reading possible is
109.5 C. The highest reading is 330 C.
The liquefier temperature is maintained at: Model: 310 C, Support: 300 C
Temperature control is accomplished using pulse wide modulation (Figure
3).
Figure 3: Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)

Actual power to the liquefier heater is supplied by the PDB, which is


controlled by the controller board. The head heaters are turned off and on
1000 times a second (pulses). The duration of the 120 VDC pulse
determines the average power being supplied to keep the liquefier at
temperature. Temperatures can be read using a volt meter at test points TP5
for model, and TP4 support on the PDB (10 mV per degree C).

Actuators, Switches & Optical Sensors


The input and output signals are passed through the PDB and then
processed by the controller board. The non-motor actuators on a uPrint
system are 24 volt solenoids. The 24 volt power is supplied by the PDB which

-9

in turn is controlled by the controller board. The following is a list of


actuators:

Door solenoid locks the door to the modeling chamber.


Carrier latches holds carriers in the material bays.
Material bay solenoids engage the motor that feeds filament from
carrier to the liquefier during auto load.

The controller board reads and updates the remaining material information
on the spool e-prom. This is accomplished through a serial interface to the
material bay encryption board. The material encryption board in turn
connects to the e-prom on the carrier/spool via two pogo pins.
The controller board monitors these switches:

Z limit switches upper and lower


X end of travel (EOT) switch
Y end of travel (ETO) switch

The controller board monitors the following optical sensors:

X home (BOT) sensor


Y home (BOT) sensor
Top of modeling base sensor

Safety Devices
The controller board monitors the following safety devices:

Chamber T/C alarm activated for a bad or missing T/C


Liquefier T/C alarm activated for a bad or missing T/C
Head and chamber snap switches
Two main thermal fuses
Door open switch
Door latch solenoid

Controller Board Layout


(Figure 4) Shows the layout of the controller board connectors with labels
indicating where each of the functions described previously are connected.
In addition to those functions, the figure shows a reset button, a set of dip
switches, and the LEDs (D1-D3 and D6-D13).

-10

Figure 4: Controller board connection detail

Reset Button
Located on the lower right side of the board, the reset button will do a hard
reset of the controller board. Before continuing with normal operation after
resetting the board, system power must be cycled before building. The reset
button should only be used after using Tera Term.

Dip Switches
There are three dip switch banks (SW2, SW5, SW6) located on the top right
side of the board. Dip switches are factory set and should not be changed
unless noted to be in another position.

-11

SW2
Number (in white) Description

Default

16-24

Off

Unused

SW5
Number (in white) Description

Default

8-15

Off

Unused

SW6
Number (in white) Description

Default

0
1

Off
Off

Run built-in self test (BIST)


Load Firmware (turn on when using SNDBIN.EXE)
Disable door latching
Unused
Dont reset controller when in command is
issued
Disable WatchDog timer
Enable use of dc commands
Unused

2
3
4
5
6
7

Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off

Memory
There are three types of memory contained on the controller board.

Dual Port RAM: The communication buffer between the controller


board and the single board computer. Events (from the controller),
commands (from the SBC), and motion control vertices (from the
SBC) are passed through the P104 connector joining the two
boards.
Flash Memory: Where the executable code resides.

Battery backup RAM; Where the controller board stores the following system
parameters:
1. Results of last power-on self test (POST)
2. Results of certain built-in diagnostic tests, if used
3. Exception trace, which is a list of the most recent exception messages
logged on the controller board
4. State information, which stores printer state when it is powered off
(includes things like the type of gantry, whether material is loaded,
the UDN, etc.).

LEDs
There are 11 LEDs located on the controller board. A grouping of three (D1D3) are located on the lower left side. The other group of eight (D6-D13) are
located on the upper right side. D1-D3 are lit when their associated voltage,
as shown in table below, is present. The 3.3 VDC supply is generated on the

-12

controller board, +5 and +12 VDC come from the PDB. One function of the
D6-D12 LEDs is that they turn on sequentially to show software download
progress. During normal operation, D13 will blink approximately once every
two seconds to indicate that the watchdog is monitoring the system and
everything is operational.
LED Label
D1
D2
D3
D6-D12
D13

Description
+3.3 VDC Supply
+5 VDC Supply
+12 VDC Supply
Debug LEDs (software use only)
Coldfire processor heartbeat

-13

Power Distribution Board (PDB)


Figure 5: PDB Detail

J1

AC Power In

J2

Power Switch/Thermostat

J3

Chamber Heaters

J22

Auxillary 120VDC power supply

J8

Z BOT, Z EOT, Chamber Fans, Frame ID, Filament detect


sensor (not used)

J9

Z motor

J10

I/O board connection

J11

I/O board connection

J7

24VDC input

J
K

Test points and LEDs (see detail in this section)


J4

5/12VDC input
Voltage indicator LEDs (see detail in this section)

J12

To material bay

J16

To external UPS (optional)

J18

LCD display from SBC

J15

To controller board (ribbon cable)

J14

To controller board (ribbon cable)

J13

To controller board (ribbon cable)

This board provides the power required to run the system. AC line voltage,
+5 VDC, +12 VDC, and +24 VDC feed into the PDB. An additional +120
VDC input feeds into the PDB for the support head heater.

-14

AC line voltage comes into the PDB (Figure 5). The voltage is routed through
the solid state relay to an auto switching circuit. The circuit is used to supply
the chamber heater voltage: 240 VAC in series, or 120 VAC in parallel. The
solid state relay is controlled by the controller board, and turns the heater
on/off to regulate the chamber temperature. A second solid state relay
provides AC line voltage to the system. It is controlled by the controller board
and safely shuts down the system when the power down switch is turned off.

The 5 VDC and 12 VDC are used by the controller board, single
board computer, and hard drive. The 12 VDC also powers the filament motors.
The 24 VDC powers the stepper motors, solenoids, fans, and chamber lights.
The 120 VDC circuit powers the model heater and a separate 120
VDC supply powers the support heater.

There are two fuses on the power distribution board.

Fuse F1 fuses the AC input to the +120 VDC supply.


Fuse F2 fuses the +120 VDC output.

Chamber Temperature Control


The chamber thermocouple (T/C) connects via the I/O board to the PDB
and is sent to the controller board. The T/C generates a variable low level
voltage that depends on the temperature of the chamber. This analog signal
from the chamber thermocouple is amplified on the I/O board and sent to
the PDB. From the amplifier, the signal goes to an A to D converter in the
ColdFire. The controller reads the chamber temperature and turns the heaters
on and off to maintain 77 C. The chamber fans run continuously when the
system is on. Temperatures can be read on the PDB using a volt meter at test
points TP22 for model, TP20 for support, and TP28 for the chamber NOTE:
10 mV = 1 degree C.

-15

Test Points and LEDs


Test points and LEDs are very useful for troubleshooting the system. The test
points and LEDs are listed below with a brief description.
Figure 6: Test points and LEDs detail

Component

Test Pt. Description

UPS

TP29

Power fail signal from external UPS

+5V REF

TP24

Head T/C service reference

Door Switch

TP15

State of the door (open or closed)

On/Off Switch

TP14

State of power down switch

Power Enable

TP8

Enables power to circuitry (normally high)

Model Toggle

TP17

Toggle travel complete

Chamber
Thermocouple

TP28

Voltage corresponds to chamber temperature


(10 mV= C)

Support
Thermocouple

TP20

Voltage corresponds to support temperature


(10 mV= C)

Model
Thermocouple

TP22

Voltage corresponds to model temperature


(10 mV= C)

HD Thermostat

TP25

Chamber and head thermostat (snap


switches)
(+5 VDC if both switches closed)
Normal = tp17 lo, tp19 hi
ch thermostat fault=tp17 lo, tp19 lo.

Head TC Alarm

TP26

High if head T/C not plugged in or open

Support Toggle

TP16

Not used

Chamber TC
Alarm

TP27

High if chamber T/C not plugged in or open

-16

Component

Test Pt. Description

X EOT

TP18

X end of travel sensor (5 VDC), switches are


wired normally closed (NC)

X Home

TP19

X home sensor (5 VDC), switches are wired


normally closed (NC)

Y EOT

TP12

Y end of travel sensor (5 VDC), switches are


wired normally closed (NC)

Y Home

TP13

Y home sensor (5 VDC), switches are wired


normally closed (NC)

Z EOT

TP10

Z end of travel sensor (5 VDC), switches are


wired normally closed (NC)

Z Home

TP9

Z home sensor (5 VDC), switches are wired


normally closed (NC)

Z Substrate

TP23

Z substrate sensor (5 VDC)

HD Type A

TP21

Not used

HD Type B

TP30

Not used

Figure 7: Voltage test points and LEDs detail

Component

Test Pt. Description

+ 5 VDC

TP3

+ 5VDC is present

+12 VDC

TP4

+ 12VDC is present

+12 VDC SW

TP5

+ 12VDC Switching is present

+24 VDC

TP6

+ 24VDC is present

+24 VDC SW TP7

+ 24VDC Switching is present

-17

I/O Card
Figure 8: I/O card detail

J510

PDB Board connection

J511

PDB Board connection

J507

Chamber thermocouple

J501

Y Motor

J502

X Motor

J503

Y BOT and Y EOT sensors

J504

Head blower fan, power on/off switch, left and right chamber
lights, LCD display, door solenoid, door switch.

J505

Umbilical cable to: Model and support heaters, toggle sensor,


X BOT and X EOT sensors

J506

Umbilical cable to: Substrate detect sensor, head drive motor,


chamber temperature alarm, model thermocouple, support
thermocouple, head temperature alarm

-18

Head Board
Figure 9: Head board layout
Rear view

D
E

K
J

I
H

G
Front view

J304

Z Sensor

J302

Head Motor Power

J303

Head Motor Ribbon Cable

J301

Umbilical Cable

J102

Support Heater

U303 X Home Sensor

J305

Toggle Sensor

D1

Support 120VDC LED (120 VDC present if on)

D2

Model 120VDC LED (120 VDC present if on)

U304 X EOT Sensor

J202

Model Heater

-19

Printer overview
HP Designjet 3D Printer and HP Designjet Color 3D Printer build models
from CAD STL files. The printer builds three-dimensional parts by extruding a
bead of ABS material through a computer-controlled extrusion head,
producing high quality parts that are ready to use immediately after
completion.
HP Designjet 3D Printer and HP Designjet Color 3D Printer consist of two
primary components the 3D printer and material bay. HP Designjet 3D
Software Solution is the preprocessing software that runs on Windows XP
Pro, Windows Vista or Windows 7 platforms.
HP Designjet 3D Printer builds a maximum part size of 8 x 6 x 6 in (203 x
152 x 152 mm). HP Designjet Color 3D Printer builds a maximum part size
of 8 x 8 x 6 in (203 x 203 x 152 mm). Each material carrier contains 40 cu.
in (700 cc) of usable material enough to build continuously for about 48
hours without reloading. You can add an optional second material bay for
extended build times.
Figure 10: Front and left side view of printer.

4
Front view

Display Panel

Material Bay, Support Side

Optional Material Bay, Support Side

Optional Material Bay, Model Side

Material Bay, Model Side

Power ON/OFF Switch

Left side view

-20

Figure 11: Interior chamber - front view

9
8

7
6

Extrusion Head

Tip wipe assembly

Purge bucket

Z stage platen

Modeling base retainers (x2)

Modeling base

Z stage guide rods

Z stage lead screw

Extrusion Tips

-21

Figure 12: Rear view of printer

8
1

9
10

11
3

12

13

14

6
15
7

16

1 Model Material Y Connector

Support Material Tube

2 Model Material Tube

10

UPS Connection

3 AC Power Cord Connector

11

Material Bay Cable Connector

4 Circuit Breaker

12

RJ-45 Network Connector

5 Material Bay

13

Diagnostics Cable Connector

6 Optional Model Material Tube

14

Material Bay Communications Cable

7 Optional Material Bay

15

Optional Material Bay Communications Cable

8 Support Material Y Connector

16

Optional Support Material Tube

-22

Figure 13: Material carriers

Model material carrier

Support material carrier

Figure 14: Modeling base

Modeling base

CAUTION: DO NOT reuse modeling bases. If a modeling base is


reused, calibration errors, poor part quality, and loss of extrusion
may occur. Additional modeling bases are available from your HP
reseller.

-23

-24

Setup
Set up the printer and material bay(s) per assembly instructions included with
printer.

Installing software
There are two software programs that work with HP Designjet 3D and HP
Designjet Color 3D:
1.

HP Designjet 3D Software Solution, installed on your workstation,


processes the STL files for printing and communicates with the printer
from your workstation.

2. System firmware, the operating software installed on the printer, controls


printer functions.
Installing HP Designjet 3D Software Solution:
1.

Locate the Startup DVD from startup kit and insert into workstation (PC).

2. Click the Install HP Designjet 3D Software Solution: button.


3. Follow prompts to finish loading HP Designjet 3D Software Solution on
the workstation.
Installing firmware to the workstation:
1.

Click the Install Firmware button to load firmware to your workstation.


You will be asked to load this firmware to your printer later.

2. Follow prompts to finish installing firmware on the workstation.


3. Install firmware to the printer, see Installing Firmware on printer on
page30.

Networking the printer


There are two methods of connecting your printer to your workstation, over a
network or with a direct connection to your workstation.
Connecting through a network:
1.

Locate the network cable (blue) from the startup kit.

2. Connect the network cable between the printer and the network hub.
Connecting directly to a workstation:
1.

Locate the crossover cable (orange) from the startup kit.

2. Connect the crossover cable between the printer and the network port
on your workstation.

-25

Establishing network communication


with the printer
You will need to establish network communication between your
workstation and printer before you can send files to be built. How you
establish this communication with an IP address is dependent upon how
your network and workstation are configured. If your network is configured
for DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol), your DHCP server will
automatically assign a Dynamic IP address to your printer. This is the default
setting for your HP Designjet printer and commonly used in large networks.
In some situations you may need to manually enter a Static IP address for
your printer and record the IP address in the HP Designjet 3D Software
Solution. Static IP addresses are frequently used for smaller networks.
Follow the instructions below to configure your workstation and network.
Establishing communication on a dynamic network:
If you are on a dynamic network (or not sure of your network type) follow
these steps to allow HP Designjet 3D Software Solution to find your printer
and establish communication.
1.

Connect a network cable between the printer and a network hub.

2. Make sure the printer is ON and determine the Unique Device Name
(UDN) for your printer.
A. From Idle (or Ready to Build), press Maintenance on the
display panel. The display will show Maintenance and the
software version.
B. From the display panel press System.
C. From the display panel press Set Network. The top window
will display: Network Admin - Dynamic IP Address; UDN.
D. The Unique Device Name (UDN) for your printer is listed
here. This is preset at the factory and cannot be changed.
3. From your workstation, start the HP Designjet 3D Software Solution.
4. From the General tab, click the Manage 3D Printers button.
5. Click the Add from Network button in the lower right corner of the window.
6. A new window, Add 3D Printer, should list your printer in the main window (identified by its UDN). Click on the printer in this window and
enter a name and location in the lower portion of the window.
7.

Click Add Printer and you are ready to print. Close the Add 3D Printer
window.
NOTE: If your printer is not displayed in the Add 3D Printer
window, you are not using a dynamic network and you will need to
set up a static network address.

-26

Establishing communication on a static network:


If you are using a static network or connecting the printer directly to a
workstation, you will need to enter the static IP address information into the
workstation and the printer. If you are using a static network and your
computer already has network access, see Setting the static network on
printer: on page28.
1.

Set the static IP address information in the workstation:


A. For Windows XP, see Establishing communication on a
static network: on page27.
B. For Windows Vista, see Setting the static network in
Windows Vista: on page27.
C. For Windows 7, see Setting the static network in Windows
7: on page28.

2. Set the static IP address information in the printer, see Setting the static
network on printer: on page28.
3. Establish communication, see Establish communication: on page29.
Setting the static network in Windows XP:
1.

From your workstation open the Control Panel and double click on
Network Connections.

2. Right click on Local Area Connection and then left click on Properties.
3. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) from the list.
4. Click on the Properties button.
5. Click on the Use the following IP address option.
6. Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway. Contact your
IT Administrator or Internet Service Provider for details regarding IP
address information.
7.

Click on the OK button when finished. Close any open networking windows.

Setting the static network in Windows Vista:


1.

From your workstation click on the Start Menu.

2. Click on the Control Panel button.


3. Double click on Network and Internet.
4. Double click on the Network and Sharing Center icon.
5. Left click on Manage network connections.
6. Right click on the Local Area Connection icon then left click on Properties.
7.

Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) from the list.

8. Click on the Properties button.


9. Click on the Use the following IP address option.

-27

10. Enter the IP address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway. Contact your IT
Administrator or Internet Service Provider for details regarding IP
address information.
11. Click on the OK button when finished. Close any open networking windows.
Setting the static network in Windows 7:
1.

From your workstation click on the Start Menu.

2. Click on the Control Panel button.


3. Double click on Network and Internet.
4. Double click on the Network and Sharing Center icon.
5. Double click Local Area Connection.
6. Click on the Properties button.
7.

Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) from the list.

8. Click on the Properties button.


9. Click on the Use the following IP address option.
10. Enter the IP address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway. Contact your IT
Administrator or Internet Service Provider for details regarding IP
address information.
11. Click on the OK button when finished. Close any open networking windows.
Setting the static network on printer:
1.

Obtain your static network address from your Network Administrator.

2. From Idle (or Ready to Build), press Maintenance on the display panel.
The display will show Maintenance and the software version.
3. Press System.
4. Press Set Network. The top window displays: Network Admin - Static IP
Address; UDN.
5. Press Static IP to display default settings.
IP Address:172.016.075.020 or 198.000.000.001
NM Address:255.255.000.000
GW Address:172.018.100.002
NOTE: These values are the factory defaults and MUST be
changed. If these values are not changed the printer will continue
to restart until they are changed.
6. Update the IP address:
Press Increment to increase the value one digit at a time.
Press Next Digit to move the cursor one place to the right.
Press Last Digit to move the cursor one place to the left.
7.

Use the three functions listed above to set your IP address.

8. After setting the final digit of the Internet Protocol (IP) address, move the
cursor one more place to the right. The cursor moves to the Netmask

-28

(NM) address. Follow the same steps for setting the Netmask (NM) and
Gateway (GW) addresses.
9. When you have finished setting the addresses, press Done. The display
will show: Change IP, Netmask and Gateway?
10. Press Yes. The panel then displays Resetting Network.
11. Press Done until Idle is displayed.
Establish communication:
1.

From your workstation, start the HP Designjet 3D Software Solution.


A. From the General tab, click the Manage 3D Printers button.
B. Click the Add from Network button in the lower right corner
of the window.
C. A new window, Add 3D Printer, should list your printer
(identified by its UDN). Click on the printer in this window
and enter a name and location of your choice in the lower
portion of the window.
D. Click Add Printer to complete. Close the Add 3D Printer
window.

2. If your printer is not displayed in the Add 3D Printer window, you will
need to add the printer IP address manually.
A. From the General tab, click the Manage 3D Printers button.
B. Click the Add Manually button in the lower right corner of
the window.
C. In the Add 3D Printer window, enter a name and location
of your choice in the appropriate fields.
D. Enter the IP Address for your printer in the appropriate field.
It will be the same address as entered in step 6.
E.

Select your printer type from the drop down list, either HP
Designjet 3D or HP Designjet Color 3D.

NOTE: If you only have one printer connected, it will be the only
printer in the list.
F.

Click Add Printer and close the Add 3D Printer window.

3. If you are unable to connect the printer to your workstation, contact your
Network Administrator.

-29

Installing Firmware on printer


1.

From the display panel, press Maintenance.

2. Press System.
3. Press Load Upgrade. Send upgrade from workstation and the printer
IP address will be displayed.
4. From your workstation, open the HP Designjet 3D Software Solution by
double clicking on the HP Designjet 3D Software Solution icon.
5. Click the Printer Services tab.
6. Select your printer from the drop down list then click the Update Software button.
7.

Navigate the HP Designjet 3D Software Solution to the directory where


the firmware file is located and select the HP Designjet 3D.upg file for
HP Designjet 3D or select the HP Designjet Color 3D.upg file for HP
Designjet Color 3D. Firmware will now begin to download to the printer.
NOTE: The printer will not allow a firmware upgrade file for a
different type of printer. If an upgrade file that is incorrect,
Upgrade - Invalid Upgrade will be shown on the display panel.

8. When firmware verification is complete, the printer display will show


Reboot to complete upgrade? Press Yes. The printer will then load the
firmware then reboot and return to Idle.
NOTE: Loading firmware will take approximately 10 minutes.

-30

Adding the second HP Designjet 3D


Material Bay
You have the option of adding a second material bay to extend printing
times without having to reload material while the model is printing.
Installing the HP Designjet 3D Material Bay:
1.

Remove the HP Designjet 3D Material Bay, material bay cable, material


spools and material carriers from the box.

2. Unload the model and support material from the printer.


3. Open the material bay doors by gently pressing in to release and pulling outwards.
4. Remove the material carriers by first pushing them in to unlatch and then
pulling them outwards.
5. Place the carriers on a flat stable surface.
CAUTION: Do not push the material through the material guide
back into the carrier, doing so can cause material to break or
become tangled.
6. Open the carriers.
7.

Rotate the spools to rewind the material, leaving 2 inches (50mm)


remaining at the material guide. See Figure 15.
Figure 15: Rewinding the material spool

8. Using a cutters, cut the excess 2 inches (50mm) of material from the
material guide. leaving a blunt end.
9. Power the printer off at the power switch.
10. When the printer has powered down, switch the circuit breaker to the
OFF position.
11. Disconnect the power cable, network cable, material bay cable and
UPS cable if used.
12. Disconnect the model and support material tubes from the printer and
the material bay by pressing in on the coupler ring and pulling the tubes
outward.
13. With 2 people, use the handgrips to lift the printer off of the material
bay and place on a flat stable surface. See Figure 16.

-31

Figure 16: Separating the printer and material bay

14. Position the second material bay on top of the existing material bay. Be
sure the feet and pins are properly aligned. See Figure 17.
Figure 17: Positioning material bays

15. With 2 people, position the printer on to the top of the material bays. Be
sure the feet and pins are properly aligned. See Figure 18.

-32

Figure 18: Positioning printer

16. Remove the black plugs from the model and support Y blocks by pushing in on the coupler rings and pulling outward. See Figure 19.
Figure 19: Removing the Y block plugs

17. Connect the short red striped material tube (M1) from model (M) coupler
of upper material bay to left side of model Y block by inserting firmly
into red couplers. Gently pull the tube to ensure it is properly inserted.
18. Repeat with the short black striped (S1) material tube for support side.
See Figure 20.

-33

Figure 20: Connecting the short material tubes

19. Connect the long red striped material tube (M2) from model (M) coupler
of lower material bay to right side of model Y block by inserting firmly
into red couplers. Gently pull the tube to ensure it is properly inserted.
20. Repeat with long black striped (S2) material tube for support side. See
Figure 21.
Figure 21: Connecting the long material tubes

21. Connect a material bay cable between the printer and the top connector
on the upper material bay.
22. Connect the other material bay cable between the bottom connector of
the upper material bay to the top connector of the lower material bay.
See Figure 22.

-34

Figure 22: Connecting the material bay cables

23. Connect the power cable, network cable and UPS cable if used.
24. Switch the circuit breaker to the ON position.
25. Power the printer ON at the power switch.
26. After the printer has booted up, you may need to reload the printer firmware. If the printer displays Send Upgrade from Workstation, See
Updating printer firmware: on page 53.
27. Insert model and support material spools into the new material carriers.
28. From display panel press Material. Display will show Add/Remove.
29. Open material bay doors and push both red handled model carriers
into right side of the material bays until they latch.
30. Push both black handled support carriers into left side of the material
bays until they latch.
31. Press Load Selected. The printer will load the first material bay and prepare the second material bay for automatic loading. When the printer
has finished loading material, S1 and M1 will be marked with asterisks.
All material bay LEDs will be solid.
NOTE: Material may take up to ten minutes to load.
32. When finished loading material press Done. Display will show Idle and
amount of material remaining for model and support in both material
bays.

-35

-36

Operation
Display panel and keypad
The main user interface for the printer is the display panel and keypad. See
Figure 23.
Figure 23: Display panel and keypad

Upper window

Keypad buttons
Lower windows

The HP Designjet 3D and HP Designjet Color 3D display panel and keypad


consist of a multiple-line LCD window with two buttons used for scrolling
through messages and four single-line windows, each with one button for
making selections. The top line in the upper window always shows the
printer status.
NOTE: If an item is blinking in the lower displays, the blinking item
is usually the next most logical selection.

-37

System firmware overview

Idle: If there is no part being built and no part in the build queue,
the display will show that the printer is Idle.

Wait for Part or Start Part: If the printer is in Idle and the build
queue is empty, you can set it to wait for a part. If the printer has a
part in the build queue, you can press Start Part to start a build.

Building: If the printer is building a part, you can choose to pause,


set the lights either ON or OFF, view the print time or material
remaining and set the printer to auto power down.

Material: From this section you can load material, unload material
or replace material.

Standby: From this section you can set the printer to Standby mode.

Maintenance: From this section you can make changes to the System, Setup or Machine.
Figure 24: Display panel hierarchy
Idle

Material

Wait for Part/Start Part


Building
Pause
Lights Off

Standby

Maintenance

Load Material
Unload Material
Replace Material

Show Time
Auto Power Down

System

Machine

Set Network

Lights Always On

Gantry

Test Parts

Select Language

Head

Load Upgrade

-38

Setup

Tips

HP Designjet 3D Software Solution


overview

General tab: This section is where you can select the model fill, support style, change the STL units and STL scale.

Orientation tab: This section allows you to rotate, resize and autoorient your parts. You can also change the view and insert a pause.

Pack tab: This section shows you which parts are in the pack for
printing. You can add parts, arrange the parts for a better fit or
clear the pack from this section.

Printer Status tab: This section shows you the amount of material
remaining (both model and support) as well as which parts are in
the Build Queue.

Printer Services tab: From this section you can check the printer history, set the printer time, set the printer password, update printer
software, get printer info and export configuration files (files containing specific operating information regarding the printer).
Figure 25: HP Designjet 3D Software Solution hierarchy
HP Designjet 3D Software Solution

General tab

Orientation tab

Pack tab

Printer Status tab

Auto orientation

Printer status

Part rotation

Job queue

STL scale

Manage queue

Printer Services tab

Change views
Insert Pause
Layer resolution

Insert CMB file

Printer history

Model fill style

Pack name

Export configuration

Support style

Clear pack

Printer time

Number of copies

Printer password

STL units

Printer information

STL scale

Update software

NOTE: For detailed information refer to HP Designjet 3D Software


Solution Dynamic Help.

-39

Processing your STL file for printing


Opening your STL file with HP Designjet 3D Software Solution:
1.

Create an STL file using your CAD software. Refer to your CAD software
help section for more information about converting your CAD drawings
into STL files.

2. Open the HP Designjet 3D Software Solution.


3. From the File menu select Open STL...
4. Navigate to and select the STL file that you have created.
Selecting layer resolution:
Layer resolution can be changed on the HP Designjet Color 3D printer.
Changing layer resolution will affect surface finish and build times. Selecting
a smaller layer resolution creates a smoother surface finish, but takes longer
to build. Layer resolution also affects the minimum wall thickness. Minimum
wall thickness applies to the horizontal (XY) plane of your part. If a feature
in an STL is smaller than the limit, the modeler will increase the size of the
feature to the minimum wall thickness.
Printer type

Available layer resolutions Min. wall thickness

HP Designjet 3D

.010 inch (.254 mm)

.036 inch (.914 mm)

HP Designjet Color 3D .010 inch (.254 mm)

.036 inch (.914 mm)

.013 inch (.3302 mm)

.047 inch (1.194 mm)

Selecting model interior fill style:


This establishes the type of fill used for the interior areas of the part. There
are three types of model interior that you can choose from.

-40

Solid - Used when a stronger, more durable part is desired. Build


times will be longer and more material will be used.

Sparse High Density - This is the default model interior style and
is highly recommended. Build times will be shorter, less material will
be used and the possibility of part curl for geometries with large
mass will be greatly reduced.

Sparse Low Density - The interior will be honeycombed or


hatched. This style allows for the shortest build times and lowest
material usage but will decrease the strength of the part.

Selecting support style:


Support material is used to support the model during the build process. It is
removed when the part is complete. Support styles will affect the support
strength and build time of the print. SMART support is the default support
setting as it uses the least amount of support material and allows for faster
build times.

Basic - May be used for most parts. Basic support uses a consistent
spacing between support toolpaths.

SMART - minimizes the amount of support material used, reduces


the build time, and improves support removal for many parts.
SMART supports use a wide spacing between toolpath rasters and
change the shape of the support region. As the supports descend
from the underside of the part feature to the base of the supports,
the support region shrinks and transforms to a simpler shape to
reduce the amount of material used and the build time. SMART supports are suitable for all parts, especially those with large support
regions.

Surround - The entire model is surrounded by support material.


Typically used for tall, thin models.

Selecting the scale of your STL file:


Before you process a part for printing, you can change the size of the part
within the build envelope. Every part has a pre-defined size within the STL
file. After you have opened the file you can change the size of the part
produced from the STL file by changing the scale. The scale always relates to
the original STL file size definition.
For example: a cube that is defined as 2 X 2 X 2 can be built to be 4 X 4 X
4 by simply changing the scale to 2.0. If after changing the scale to 2.0, you
decide that a size of 3 X 3 X 3 would be preferred, change the scale to 1.5 the scale relates to the original size of 2.0, NOT the resulting 4.0 from the
first scale change.
Click within the scale input box to type a scale of your choice.
Selecting the orientation of your STL file:
The Orientation tab has an expanded preview window. It provides options
for viewing a part, measuring a part, orienting a part, processing a part and
viewing the layers of a part. How a part is oriented in the preview window
will determine how the part is oriented when it prints.
Orientation impacts build speed, part strength, surface finish and material
consumption. Orientation can also affect the ability of HP Designjet 3D
Software Solution to repair any problems with the STL file.
You can choose to auto orient your part, which allows HP Designjet 3D
Software Solution to determine the best orientation for the part for the fastest
build time and least material usage, or you can manually change the
orientation of your part.

-41

Orientation Considerations:

Build Speed - Closely related to material use. A lesser amount of


supports will allow for a faster build speed.
Another factor affecting build speed is the axis orientation. The
printer can build faster across the X-Y plane than it can along the Z
axis. Orienting a part so that it is shorter within the modeling envelope will produce a quicker build.

Part Strength - A model is stronger within a layer than it is across


layers. Depending upon what features you want your part to demonstrate, you may need to orient your part to have its greatest
strength across a specific area. For example a tab that needs to be
pressed would be weakest if you are applying pressure across layers.

Surface Finish - Much like orienting for strength, how the part is
oriented will determine how the surface finish will look and allow
the printer to provide the smoothest finish for a specific area. For
example, if building a cylinder, orienting the cylinder upright will
have a smoother surface finish than building it on its side.

STL File Repair - It is possible for an STL file to have errors while
appearing to be trouble free. If the STL file contains errors, HP
Designjet 3D Software Solution may have problems processing the
file. HP Designjet 3D Software Solution has the ability to automatically correct some STL file errors. How the part is oriented can
impact this automated repair function.

Adding your STL file to the pack:


The Add to Pack button is found on the General, Orientation and Pack tabs.
When you click on the Add to Pack button, HP Designjet 3D Software
Solution will add the file that is currently in the preview window (General tab
or Orientation tab) to the pack preview window (Pack tab).
If the file in the preview window has not been processed for printing,
processing will occur before the file is added to the pack. Each additional
click of the Add to Pack button will add another copy of the file to the pack.
Printing your STL file:
The Print button is found on the General, Orientation and Pack tabs.
HP Designjet 3D Software Solution will now process all parts in the pack
and create a CMB file from which the printer will print the parts.

-42

Building a part
If a part has not been sent to your printer for building, the build queue will
be empty. If the build queue is empty the display panel will show Idle or
Ready to build.
Choose whether or not you want to start a build from a remote location or
from the display panel at the printer.
Starting a build from a remote location:
The lower display will show Wait for Part and it will be flashing.
1.

From the display panel press Wait for Part. The display will ask Is
Model Base Installed?

2. Insert a modeling base.


CAUTION: DO NOT reuse modeling bases. If a modeling base is
reused, calibration errors, poor part quality, and loss of extrusion
may occur. Additional modeling bases are available from your HP
reseller.
3. Press Yes. Waiting for Part will now be on the display.
4. From your HP Designjet 3D Software Solution workstation, send a part
to the printer. The printer will automatically start to build the part.
Starting a build from the display panel:
If Wait for Part has not been activated, you can send the part to the printer
and start the part from the display panel after the part has been sent to the
printer.
1.

From your HP Designjet 3D Software Solution workstation, send a part


to the printer. The display will show Idle/Ready to Build and the name of
the first file that is in the queue waiting to be built.

2. Insert a modeling base.


CAUTION: DO NOT reuse modeling bases. If a modeling base is
reused, calibration errors, poor part quality, and loss of extrusion
may occur. Additional modeling bases are available from your HP
reseller.
3. From the display panel press Start Model to start building the part.

-43

The display panel during build


The top two lines of the display panel will show the printer status. See Figure
26. The bottom line of the display panel will show the amount of model and
support material that remains in the carriers.
Figure 26: Display panel during build
Single material bay
Printer status
Model file name
Support material
remaining

Model material
remaining

Dual material bay


Printer status
Model file name
Support material
remaining in bay 1
Support material
remaining in bay 2

Model material remaining


in bay1
Model material remaining
in bay2

NOTE: If a material amount is flashing, it indicates that the


remaining material will not be enough to complete the current build.

Chamber Lights
When a part starts to build, the chamber lights are automatically ON. The
default time-out for the lights is 30 minutes. You can toggle the lights ON or
OFF through the display panel.
You can set the chamber lights on permanently, however the chamber lights
will return to factory settings when power is cycled.
1.

From Idle or Ready to Build, on the display panel press Maintenance.

2. Press Setup.
3. Press Lights Always On.
Repeat this process to turn this option off.

-44

Pausing a build
While building a part, you may want to pause the build to allow for material
replacement. To pause the build at any time, from the display panel press
Pause.
NOTE: The printer will complete the current tool path before
pausing.

Resuming after pause


If you have pressed Pause, and are ready to resume building the part, press
Resume and the printer will resume printing.

Canceling a build
You can cancel a build at any time while the part is building.
1.

From the display panel press Pause.

2. Once the printer stops building, press Cancel Build.


3. The display will ask Are you Sure? Press Yes.
4. The display will show Build Stopped followed by the file name. You will
then be prompted to remove the part and replace the modeling base.
5. Remove the part and replace the modeling base.
GLOVES: The modeling base will be hot, wear gloves when
removing the part from the printer.
6.

Once the chamber door has been opened and closed, the display will
ask Part Removed? Press Yes ONLY after you have removed the part
and replaced the modeling base.
CAUTION: If you press Yes before removing the part, the printer
can be damaged.

-45

Removing a completed part


When the printer has completed building a part, the display will show
Completed followed by the file name. It will also show Remove Part and
Replace Modeling Base.
GLOVES: The modeling base will be hot, wear gloves when
removing the part from the printer.
1.

Open the chamber door.

2. Turn the modeling base retainers down and remove the modeling base
by sliding out and pulling up.
3. Insert a new modeling base by sliding in and pushing down, turn the
retainers up to lock the modeling base in place.
4. Close the chamber door.
5. After you have opened and closed the door, the display will show Part
Removed? ONLY after removing the part and replacing the modeling
base, from the display panel press Yes.
CAUTION: If you press Yes before removing the part, the
printer can be damaged.
After you press Yes, the display will show the status as Idle or Ready to Build
for the next part in the queue.
Remove a part from the modeling base:
1.

After removing the modeling base from the printer, firmly flex the
modeling base back and forth with your hands to loosen the part.

2. Pull the part off of the modeling base or use a putty knife to completely
remove the part.
NOTE: Parts are easier to remove from the modeling base when still
warm.

Removing support material


HP Designjet 3D and HP Designjet Color 3D use soluble support material
which is designed to dissolve in a soap and water based solution. Your part
is left with a smooth and clean finish with the fine details intact. The soluble
support material can be removed by hand with relative ease, but is designed
to be dissolved from your parts for hands free finishing.
WARNING: Support material is sharp, wear safety glasses and
gloves when removing support material.

-46

Emptying the purge bucket


Empty the purge bucket after each build to avoid part quality issues or
damage to the printer.
GLOVES: Wear gloves when emptying the purge bucket.

1.

With a gloved hand, lift up on the purge bucket and pull it off of the two
mounts. See Figure 27.
Figure 27: Emptying the purge bucket

Purge bucket

2. Empty the purge bucket.


3. Place the purge bucket over the two mounts and push down to lock in
place.
CAUTION: When reinstalling the purge bucket, make sure that it
locks on both mounts and hangs flush with the chamber wall to
avoid damage.

Replacing material for single material


bay
1.

From the display panel press Material... The display will show Add/
Remove and S1(remaining%) and M1(remaining%). Asterisks will
mark the currently active material bays (the material bays that are
currently loaded to the head).

2. Press Unload...
3. Select Unload both, Unload Model or Unload Support.
4. The printer will now unload material from the head. When the material
has unloaded, you will need to replace the material carriers.
5. Open the material bay doors by gently pressing in to release and pulling outwards.

-47

6. Remove the material carriers by first pushing them in to unlatch and then
pulling them outwards.
7.

Place the carrier on a flat stable surface.

CAUTION: Do not push the material through the material guide


back into the carrier, doing so can cause material to break or
become tangled.
8. Open the carrier.
9. Rotate the spool to rewind the material, leaving 2 inches (50mm)
remaining at the material guide. See Figure 28.
Figure 28: Rewinding the material spool

10. Using a cutters, cut the excess 2 inches (50mm) of material from the
material guide. leaving a blunt end.
11. Replace the material spool.
12. Close and latch the carrier.
13. Once the material carriers have been replaced press Load...
14. Select Load Model, Load Support or Load both.
15. After material has been loaded to the head press Done...

Replacing material for dual material


bays
1.

From the display panel press Material... The display will show Add/
Remove and S1(remaining%), S2(remaining%) and M1, M2
(remaining%). Asterisks will mark the currently active material bays (the
material bays that are currently loaded to the head).

2. Press Unload...
3. Press Unload both, Unload Model or Unload Support.
4. The printer will now unload material from the head. When the material
has unloaded, you will need to replace the material carriers.
5. Open the material bay doors by gently pressing in to release and pulling outwards.
6. Remove the material carriers by first pushing them in to unlatch and then
pulling them outwards.

-48

7.

Place the carrier on a flat stable surface.


CAUTION: Do not push the material through the material guide
back into the carrier, doing so can cause material to break or
become tangled.

8. Open the carrier.


9. Rotate the spool to rewind the material, leaving 2 inches (50mm)
remaining at the material guide. See Figure 29.
Figure 29: Rewinding the material spool

10. Using a cutters, cut the excess 2 inches (50mm) of material from the
material guide, leaving a blunt end.
11. Replace the material spool.
12. Close and latch the carrier.
13. Once the material carriers have been replaced press Load...
14. You can select which carriers you want to load to the head by selecting
Next Model or Next Support. When done selecting press Load Selected.
15. The printer will now load the selected material bays and prepare the
other bays for automatic loading. After they are done loading and preparing, press Done... the display will show Wait for Part or Ready to
Build.

Material bay LEDs


The table below will show the status indicated by the LEDs.
On

Material currently loaded to the head

Off

No carrier present
Carrier present and ready to be loaded

Blinking

Carrier needs replacement (is empty or has an


error)

-49

Replacing material spools


Removing a spool of material from the carrier:
1.

Place the carrier on a flat stable surface.

2. Unlatch the carrier and open.


3. Remove the spool of material. Discard any pieces of material
that may remain in the carrier.
4. Remove the material guide and recycle.
5. Recycle the empty material spool.
6. Install a new material spool into the material carrier.

Storing material spools


If you will not be using the printer for more than 72 hours, unload and store
model and support material in the storage bags provided to prevent moisture
absorption.
1.

Unload material from the printer.

2. Open the material bay doors by gently pressing in to release and pulling outwards.
CAUTION: Do not push the material through the material
guide back into the carrier, doing so can cause material to
break or become tangled.
3. Remove the material carriers by first pushing them in to unlatch and then
pulling them outwards.
4. Place the carrier on a flat stable surface.
5. Open the carrier.
6. Rotate the spool to rewind the material, leaving 2 inches (50mm)
remaining at the material guide. See Figure 30.

-50

Figure 30: Rewinding the material spool

7.

Using a cutters, cut the excess 2 inches (50mm) of material from the
material guide, leaving a blunt end.

8. Locate the two material retaining clips on the carrier. See Figure 31.
Figure 31: Material retaining clips

Material retaining clips

9. Place the material guide in the material guide slot on the spool. See Figure 32.
10. Place the material in the material notches. See Figure 32.
Figure 32: Material guide slot and notches

-51

11. Cut the excess material from material guide.


12. Place the material retaining clips on the spool before removing the spool
from the carrier. See Figure 33.
A. Push the material retaining clips over the material and clip
on to the material spool.
B. Push the material retaining clips down until they lock in
place.
Figure 33: Installing material retaining clips

Place clip and push down to lock in place

13. Remove the material spool from the material carrier. See Figure 34.
Figure 34: Properly installed material retaining clips.

14. Place the material spool in the storage bag that came with the material
carrier.
NOTE: When not loaded in the printer, always store material spools
in the material carrier or the storage bag that came with the carrier
to prevent moisture absorption.

Auto power down


You can set the printer to automatically power down when a build is
complete. This option will save energy usage.
1.

While the printer is building, press the Auto Power Down button.

2. Turn the power switch, located on the left side of the printer, to the OFF
position.
The printer will display Auto Power Down Mode and the printer will power
down as soon as the build is complete.
Cancelling auto power down:
1.

Turn the power switch back to the ON position.

-52

Powering off
To power off the printer, turn the power switch to the OFF position. You can
do this at anytime without harming the printer. No other steps are necessary.
If this is done while the printer is building a part, the current part will not be
completed.
NOTE: System cooling fans and lights will continue to operate for
several minutes after the switch has been turned off.

Resuming operations from Standby


mode
After several minutes of inactivity, the printer will enter Standby mode.
During Standby, the head temperature will decrease to conserve energy.
From the display panel press Resume.

Updating printer firmware:


Check http://www.hp.com for printer firmware updates. If there is an
upgrade to the printer firmware, download the upgrade and install on the
printer.
Installing the firmware:
1.

From the printer display panel, press Maintenance.

2. Press System.
3. Press Load Upgrade. The printer will then display Send upgrade from
workstation followed by the printers IP address.
4. Open HP Designjet 3D Software Solution and click on the Printer Services tab.
5. Click on the Update Software button. HP Designjet 3D Software Solution
will now connect to the printer and will prompt you to locate the
upgrade file. Navigate HP Designjet 3D Software Solution to the directory where the upgrade file is located. The update will automatically be
loaded on to the printer. After the update has been loaded, the display
will show Verifying update.
6. When verification is complete, the display will show Reboot to complete.
Press Yes. The printer will now reboot and return to Idle.
7.

Press the Maintenance button and verify the updated version was
installed correctly then exit maintenance.

-53

-54

Software
Software Architecture
(Figure 35) shows the major software components that control the system.
The software that runs on the controller board is EPROM based. The
software that runs on the SBC (single board computer) is stored on the hard
drive and loaded during power up. Like all workstation compatible
computers, the SBC runs a brief self-test on power up and then loads the
operating system followed by the systems application components.
Figure 35: Software Architecture Diagram

Operating System
The printers software currently runs on RedHat Linux. The operating system is
multi tasking allowing the software components to run fairly independently.
The operating system also provides support for the TCP/IP network interface
and the hard drive.

Display Driver
This software interacts with the operator display panel on the front of the
system. This software processes all button pushes. The driver also formats the
information going to the four line display and the context sensitive button
labels.

-55

Comm Server
The comm server software on the system is the other half of the download
software that is part of the HP Designjet 3D Software Solution. Parts to be
built (.cmb files) are received by the comm server and saved on the data
partition of the hard drive. Queue management of the parts to be built is
also part of the comm server. Lastly the comm server provides HP Designjet
3D Software Solution the printer status information that is displayed on the
workstation (PC).

System Manager
The system manager software provides the overall control and decision
making functions that are used by the system during all operations. User
requests are received from the display driver (in response to button pushes).
The requests are processed and commands sent to the controller board to
activate the appropriate hardware.

Move Compiler
When Start Part is requested the system manager activates the move
compiler. The move compiler retrieves the cmb file from the top of the queue.
The CMB file defines the tool path for the part on a layer by layer basis. The
move compiler calculates the proper extrusion rate for the road thus
combining tool path and extrusion. The resulting motion control is saved in a
PCB file.

Feeder
This driver takes the output of the move compiler and feeds the motion
control information to the controller board on demand. The feeder will
typically start before the move compiler has finished the calculations for the
part. This eliminates waiting for all calculation to be complete. As the
controller board executes the motion control commands they are removed
from dual port memory. The feeder adds new commands as space becomes
available.

Event/Command Monitor
This software handles all non-motion control interactions between the single
board computer and the controller board. Events are printer status
information being sent to the single board computer. Commands come from
the single board computer telling the controller board to do something such
as find home.

-56

HP Designjet 3D Software Solution


Help
HP Designjet 3D Software Solution overview
HP Designjet 3D Software Solution is an intuitive, user-friendly application
designed to interface with HP Designjet 3D printers. It allows you to quickly
and easily open a 3D drawing of a part, prepare the drawing for print, and
send the print command to create the part.
HP Designjet 3D Software Solution provides 'Help' information in two ways through a conventional help file and through a Dynamic Help system.

Conventional help file


The entire Help file is accessible through the menu bar (Help>Contents). This
will open HP Designjet 3D Software Solution help in a separate window
containing standard help tools - table of contents, search, index, and
personally selected favorites.

Dynamic help
Dynamic Help is available from within the HP Designjet 3D Software
Solution window. The right side of the application window is dedicated to
Dynamic Help.

-57

-58

Maintenance
Startup kit tools
The startup kit contains a set of tools used to help you maintain the printer.
The following is a list of the tools contained in the startup kit.

Needle nose pliers


T-Handled allen wrench - 1/8 inch
T-Handled allen wrench - 7/64 inch
Gloves (Leather)
Cutters
Brush
Magnifier

Preventive Maintenance
Daily
Empty the purge bucket
Empty the purge bucket after each build has completed.
Inspect the tip wipe assembly
After each build you should inspect the tip wipe assembly to make sure there
is no material build up. If there is material build up, clean the tip wipe
assembly. Material build up on the tip wipe assembly can cause part quality
issues. See Tip wipe assembly on page60.
Inspect the tip shields
After each build you should inspect the tip shields for damage or material
build up. If there is material build up remove it as needed. If the material will
not break free or there is damage to the tip shield, replace the tip shield. See
Tip shield replacement on page62.
Remove debris buildup
Remove all material buildup on the Z platform and around the lead screw.
Failure to do so could cause the base to not be level or the Z platform to jam
at its upper limit.
Vacuum build chamber
Vacuum the build chamber to remove all debris and purged material.
Clean door
Do not use ammonia based glass cleaner on the door. It will damage the
acrylic window.
CAUTION: ONLY use acrylic cleaner.

-59

500 Hour maintenance


Preventive Maintenance Alerts will be displayed on the workstation at the
500 hour time interval as a reminder to perform preventive maintenance.
See Figure 36.
Figure 36: Preventive Maintenance Alert

Tip wipe assembly


The tip wipe assembly should be replaced approximately every 500 hours.
1.

Completely power down the printer.

2. Move the head to the right of the printer to gain access to the tip wipe
assembly.
Figure 37: Move the toggle head to the right

3. Remove the tip wipe assembly by lifting the assembly up and out of the
printer. Discard this tip wipe assembly. See Figure 38.

-60

Figure 38: Replacing the tip wipe assembly

4. Place the new tip wipe assembly over the two mounting posts making
sure the assembly is fully installed. See Figure 39.
Figure 39: Installing tip wipe assembly

5. Power the printer back up.

-61

Tip shield replacement


Tip shields can become worn or damaged over time. This can have a
negative impact on the surface finish and detail of models. Replace the tip
shields every 500 hours.
Figure 40: Tip Shield damage

New shield
1.

Worn shield

Enter Head Maintenance.


A. From the display panel press Maintenance.
B. Press Machine.
C. Press Head. The head will come to rest in the center of the
chamber and the Z platform will change position.
GLOVES: The head area is hot, wear gloves when working in this
area of the printer.

2. Remove the head cover by pressing the tabs in and pulling away from
the head. See Figure 41.
Figure 41: Head cover tab locations
Press tabs in to
remove head
cover
Head cover

-62

3. Position the blade of a small screwdriver between the tip shield and tip
plate. Use the blade of the small screwdriver to separate the tip shield
from the tip plate. See Figure 42.
Figure 42: Tip Shield removal

Insert small standard


screwdriver to pry tip
shields from tips.

Tip shield

Tip plate

4. Clean the tip using the wire brush supplied with the Startup Kit to
remove any debris. See Figure 43.
Figure 43: Clean tips with wire brush

Clean the tips using a wire brush.

5. Install a new tip shield by pushing it, by hand, over the exposed tip,
keeping the slotted end towards the back of the tip. See Figure 44.

-63

Figure 44: Tip Shield installation

6. Exit Maintenance, press Done until back at Idle.

Remove debris from the Filament Present switch


There may be a time when the Filament Present switch needs to be cleared in
addition to the 500 hour maintenance. For example, if a Material ErrorFilament blocked message appears on the display panel; the
recommendation may be to clear debris from the Filament present switch.
1.

Unload material from the printer and remove the material carriers.

2. Open the material bay doors by gently pressing in to release and pulling outwards.
3. Remove the material carriers by first pushing them in to unlatch and then
pulling them outwards.
4. Disconnect the material tubes from the rear of the material bay(s). Leave
them attached to the Y block.
5. Locate the entrance hole to the Filament Present Switch in the material
bay(s). See Figure 45.

-64

Figure 45: Filament Present Switch location


Support side Filament Present Switch

Model side Filament Present Switch

6. Obtain a can of compressed air.


7.

Insert the canned air extension tube to its spray nozzle.

8. Align the canned air extension tube with the entrance hole of the Filament Present Switch. See Figure 46.
Figure 46: Cleaning the Filament Present Switch

9. Squeeze the spray nozzle for one quick burst (approximately 2 seconds)
to clear each Filament Present Switch on the model and support sides of
the material bay. If an optional material bay is installed, repeat this procedure for the second bay.
10. Reconnect the material tubes to the rear of the material bay(s).
11. Replace the material carriers and load material.

-65

2000 Hour maintenance


Tip replacement and calibration
A Preventive Maintenance Alert will be displayed after 2000 hours of run
time informing you that tips need to be replaced and calibrated. See Figure
47.
Figure 47: Preventive Maintenance Alert

NOTE: Tips can also be damaged by improper care while


performing maintenance in the area around the tips.
HP Designjet 3D Software Solution displays the tip time (hrs) - from
the Printer Services Tab - Printer Info button (Tip time will reset to
zero after replacement).
Removing tips:
1.

You will need to make sure the printer is powered ON before replacing
the extrusion tips.

2. From the display panel press Maintenance.


3. Press Machine.
4. Press Tip.
5. Press Replace.
6. The printer will display Load Model - Unloading.
7.

You can now open the printer door and replace the tips - or you can
Cancel the tip replacement procedure.

8. Remove plastic head cover by squeezing raised pads on sides of cover.


See Figure 48.

-66

Figure 48: Head cover tab locations

Press tabs in to
remove head
cover
Head cover

9. Remove tips
A. Use 7/64 T-Handle Allen wrench to loosen the heater block
screws three to four full turns counterclockwise - or until the
top of the screws are flush with the metal cover. DO NOT
remove the screws entirely. See Figure 49.
Figure 49: Tip Removal

Loosen but do not


remove heater block
screws

Loosen but do not


remove heater block
screws

B. Use needle nose pliers to grasp the stainless steel shield of


the tip.
C. Pull the tip shield toward you, then pull down to remove the
tip from the heater block. Discard the used tip. See Figure
50.

-67

Figure 50: Remove the tips

Pull tips down to remove

D. Repeat for second tip if necessary.


Installing tips:
1.

Place the tip shield on the tip. Be sure to install the proper tip. See Figure
51.
Figure 51: Tip shield alignment

Slotted end

Slotted end

Align the tip shield so the slotted end is facing


the back of the printer

2. With gloved hand, insert the new tip into the heater block. With the slotted side towards the rear of the printer. See Figure 52.

-68

Figure 52: Install the tips

3. Use needle nose pliers to grasp the stainless steel shield of the tip.
4. Pull the tip shield toward you, then lift up to install the tip.
5. Push the tip toward the back of the printer once it is all the way up
against the heater block.
6. Verify the tip is fully inserted into the heater block and that the stainless
steel shield is aligned. See Figure 53.
7.

Use 7/64 T-Handle Allen wrench to firmly tighten the heater block
clamp screws. See Figure 53.
NOTE: Make sure the tip remains all the way up against the heater
block as you tighten the screws.

-69

Figure 53: Tighten heater block clamp screws.

Tighten screws

Tighten screws

8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 for the other tip if necessary.


9. Replace head cover and close the printer door.
10. The printer will display Tip Maintenance - Tips Replaced? - press Yes to
begin material load.
A. The printer will display Load Model - Replace Both Carriers
(flashing).
If you want to replace a material carrier, do so now.
If you do NOT want to change a material carrier, you must
unlatch and latch the carriers to continue (Push the carrier forward to unlatch, then push it forward again to latch).
Because the material unloaded during the tip replacement,
the printer is in the material replacement mode. You must
unlatch and then latch the carriers to continue. If there is a
delay in the unlatch/latch process, the printer will display
Both Carriers Not Replaced Or Invalid. Select Retry, then
unlatch and latch the carriers.
B. The printer will now begin to load material.
C. After material loading is complete the printer will display
Tip Calibration - Install Modeling Base And Build
Calibration Part.
NOTE: Make sure a NEW modeling base is installed before
starting calibration. Calibration results will be incorrect if a NEW
modeling base is not used.

-70

Tip calibration:
Tip replacement requires Tip Calibration.
1.

Select Start Part (flashing) - the printer will run two calibration parts.

The printer will automatically build a Z Calibration part, measure


the part and calibrate the Z Axis for tip depth and tip level (approximately 5 minutes). The Z calibration is automatic.

The printer will then automatically build an XY Calibration part


(approximately 10 minutes). You must inspect the XY Calibration
part and calibrate the X and Y axis for tip offset:

2. When the XY Calibration part is complete the printer will display


Remove Part and Select XY Adjustment - X:0, Y:0
3. Remove the XY tip calibration part from the printer.
4. Inspect the part and calibrate the X and Y axis. See Figure 54.
A. Use the magnifier from the Startup kit to view the support
road (shown in red).
B. Identify the location on the +X or X side of the part where
the support road is best centered within the model
boundaries (shown in blue).
C. Read the number closest to this location. This is the required
X Tip Offset adjustment. If the number is on the -X side, a
negative offset is required.
D. Select Increment or Decrement to input the X offset
adjustment - the value will change in the upper display
window (by default, the printer will be ready to accept the
X value).
E.

When you are satisfied with your X offset value, Select Y


and repeat steps A- D to identify and input the required Y
Tip Offset adjustment.

-71

Figure 54: Example XY Tip Offset Part.


This example requires an adjustment of X = + 2, Y = - 4

5. Select Done after you have input the X and Y offsets. The printer will
return to Maintenance. Run the XY calibration a second time to be sure
the values changed the offset properly.
6. When finished, press Done until back at Idle.

-72

Chamber light bar replacement


1.

Power down the printer.

2. Locate the wiring harness leading away from the top of the light bar.
3. Disconnect the light bar from the wiring harness by squeezing the wiring
harness clip while pulling down.
4. Remove the light bar by removing the three attachment screws (top, middle, bottom) - use the 7/64 T-handle wrench supplied in the startup kit.
5. Install a replacement light bar with the three attachment screws - do not
overtighten the screws.
6. Re-attach the wiring harness lead.
Figure 55: Chamber light bar locations

-73

-74

Troubleshooting
User Troubleshooting
Problem

Recommendation

No power

1. Verify power cord is securely plugged in.


2. Verify that the circuit breaker (at rear of
printer) and the power switch (on left side
panel of printer) are both in the ON position.
3. Verify AC power is present at wall outlet,
i.e. plug a known good item into outlet.

Material not extruding

Material may be clogged in tip. See Clogged tip


on page79.

Purge material accumulating Check condition of tip wipe assembly. Replace if


on part.
worn.
No text displayed on
Display Panel

Cycle power.

Cannot communicate with


printer through network or
crossover cable

1.

Error code displayed on


display panel

Record error code and reboot printer. If error code


repeats, contact Technical Support. For more
information, refer toFault determination codes on
page77.

Build Error

Partial or bad part file sent to printer. Check STL file


in CAD software for errors; reprocess STL in HP
Designjet 3D Software Solution and re-download to
printer.

Make sure network cables are connected at the printer, at the PC, or where cables
connect to network hubs.
2. Re-configure network settings.
3. If using a static network address, verify that
the IP address entered in HP Designjet 3D
Software Solution matches the IP address
entered in the printer.
4. Your network configuration may have
changed. Contact your Network Administrator.

-75

Error message on
display panel

Recommendation

Cant Find Home Check


Modeling Base

1.

Material Error
Filament error

1.

Verify a modeling base is inserted.

2. Modeling base may be used or defective


replace.
Remove the carrier and verify material is
coming out of the material guide.

2. Verify material pulls freely from the carrier.


3. Verify the material tubes are free of material.
4. Reload material.
Material Error
Filament blocked

1.

Remove carrier and verify material pulls


freely from carrier.

2. Verify the material tubes are free of material.


3. If the path is not obstructed, clean debris
from Filament Present Switch. See
Remove debris from the Filament Present
switch on page64.
4. Reload material.
Material Error
Carrier invalid

1.

Remove carrier and verify it is not empty.

2. Replace material spool.


3. Reload material.

Material Error
Filament broken

1.

Remove the carrier and verify material is


coming out of the material guide.

2. Verify material pulls freely from the carrier.


3. Verify the material tubes are free of material.
4. Reload material.
Load Error
Filament blocked

1.

Remove the carrier and verify material is


coming out of the material guide.

2. Verify the material pulls freely from the


carrier.
3. Verify the material tubes are free of material.
4. If the path is not obstructed, clean debris
from Filament Present Switch. See
Remove debris from the Filament Present
switch on page64.
5. Reload material.

-76

Error message on
display panel

Recommendation

Load Error
Purge failed

1.

Remove the carrier and verify material is


coming out of the material guide.

2. Verify the material pulls freely from the


carrier.
3. Verify the material tubes are free of material.
4. Check for and clear any excess material
build up around the tips.
Unload Error
Unload failed

Remove the carrier and verify the material


tubes are free of material.

Model/Support Jam
in head
clear before resuming

See Material Jam on page 80.

Pausing

1.

Press Resume.

2. Unload the material carriers and reinstall.


Model/Support Jam

See Material Jam on page 80.

in head
clear before resuming
Cant Find Home Check
Modeling Base

1.

Verify a modeling base is inserted.

2. Modeling base may be used or defective


replace.

NOTE: Certain Filament related error messages will allow you to


enter maintenance mode after a 30 second timeout.

Fault determination codes


If a fault occurs which would prevent the printer from executing an operator
request, the printer will begin to shut down and cool. The panel will display
an error code. An error-code list (with the filename error.txt) can be found
on the DVD-ROM for the printer firmware. (Because this list may change with
each new software version, be sure to check the error.txt attachment when
you download new firmware upgrades.)
After the printer has finished cooling, the only option displayed is Continue.
Press Continue and the printer will reboot and try to return to normal
operation. If pressing Continue does not eliminate the error, power should
be cycled (see Cycling power on page78..); wait 60 seconds before
switching power on again. In most cases you will be able to continue
operation. However, if the printer continues to shut down and display the
same error, contact technical support.

-77

Cycling power
1.

Turn the power switch to the OFF position. The display will show
Shutting Down.

2. After the printer has cooled down enough to shut down, the display will
go blank.
3. When the display is blank and the printer has shut down, turn the circuit
breaker to the OFF position.
4. Once the circuit breaker has been turned to the OFF position, wait 60
seconds and turn the circuit breaker back to the ON position.
5. Turn the power switch to the ON position. The printer display will show
that it is starting up.
Once the display shows Idle or Ready to Print, you can send a file to the
printer to be printed.

Diagnosing loss of extrusion


Occasionally, the printers head may experience loss of extrusion. This will
be evident by observing one of the following:

The head is moving with no material coming out of either tip


The height of the model and support materials are not equal
Sagging structures due to lack of support materials
GLOVES: The head area is hot. Use gloves when working in this
area of printer.

1.

From the display panel press Cancel and remove parts from the printer.

2. Insert a new modeling base.


3. From Idle, press Maintenance
4. Press Machine.
5. Press Head. The head will move to the center of the chamber and the Z
platform will change position. The display will read: Model Drive Motor
Stopped
6. Determine if there is a model material extrusion problem by pressing
Forward (command will be available after head reaches operating temperature). Watch the model tip (right tip) for any extrusion (material
purge).
NOTE: You may need to wait up to 30 seconds before extrusion will
begin as the tip may need to reach operating temperature
7.

Press Stop to stop the extrusion.

8. If material did NOT flow from the model tip, see Recovering from loss
of extrusion on page82.. If material steadily flowed from the model tip,
the model tip is functioning properly.
9. Test the support material tip by choosing: Select Drive.

-78

10. Determine if there is a support material extrusion problem by pressing


Forward. Watch the support tip (left tip) for any extrusion (material
purge).
11. Press Stop to stop the extrusion.
12. If material did NOT flow from the support tip, see Recovering from loss
of extrusion on page82. If material steadily flowed from the support
tip, the support tip is functioning properly.
13. Return the printer to the Maintenance state - Press Done, then press Yes
when the printer displays Is Material Loaded?
14. Press Done until back at Idle.

Clogged tip
Occasionally, a tip may clog with material. This will often result in a loss of
extrusion (LOE). A clogged tip will prohibit material load and part building.
1.

Remove the head cover by pressing the tabs in and pulling away from
the head. See Figure 56.
GLOVES: The head area is hot. Use gloves when working in this
area of printer.
Figure 56: Remove the head cover

Head Cover

Press tabs in to
remove head
cover

2. Inspect top of tips for material build up. If there is excess material build
up see Recovering from loss of extrusion on page82. If there is no
excess material build up close the chamber door and continue.
3. From the display panel press Maintenance.
4. Press Machine. The printer will calibrate which will take approximately 3
minutes.

-79

5. Press Head. The head will heat up to operating temperature which will
take approximately 3 minutes.
6. Press Select Drive and choose the drive that may have the clogged tip.
7.

Press Forward, the drive wheel will turn the selected drive forward.

8. Press Blower Off, this will turn the head cooling fan off for 10 seconds,
allowing the tip to heat up beyond operating temperature. If material
starts to extrude the tip is no longer clogged. If material does not
extrude see Recovering from loss of extrusion on page82.
9. Press Done.
10. Display will ask Which Materials Loaded? Press Both.
11. Press Done until back to Idle.

Material Jam
Occasionally, material may become jammed in the head. The printer will
notify you of a material jam through a message shown on the display panel.
If a material jam is detected, follow these steps to clear the jam.
1.

From the display panel, press Continue.

2. Press Maintenance.
3. Press Machine.
4. Press Head.
5. Once in head maintenance mode, remove the head cover by pressing
the tabs in and pulling away from the head. See Figure 57.
GLOVES: The head area is hot. Use gloves when working in this
area of printer.

Figure 57: Remove the head cover

Head Cover

-80

Press tabs in to
remove head
cover

6. Inspect tip inlets for material build up see Figure 58. If there is excess
material build up see Recovering from loss of extrusion on page82. If
there is no excess material build up close the chamber door and continue.
Figure 58: Tip inlet locations

Support tip inlet

7.

Model tip inlet

Press Select Drive and choose the drive that may have the clogged tip.

8. Press Forward, the drive wheel will turn the selected drive forward.
9. Press Blower Off, this will turn the head cooling fan off for 10 seconds,
allowing the tip to heat up beyond operating temperature. If material
starts to extrude the tip is no longer clogged. If material does not
extrude see Recovering from loss of extrusion on page82.. If material
extrudes, you can continue building your part.
10. Reinstall the head cover.
NOTE: If the head cover is not replaced the printer may not function
properly.
11. Press Done.
12. Display will ask Which Materials Loaded? Press Both.
13. Press Done until back to Pause screen.
Press Resume to continue building the part.

-81

Recovering from loss of extrusion


NOTE: It is recommended that you read and understand this entire
procedure before performing any of the work.
1.

Enter Head Maintenance mode.


A. From Idle, press Maintenance.
B. Press Machine.
C. Press Head. The head will heat up to operating temperature
which will take approximately 3 minutes.
GLOVES: The head area is hot. Use gloves when working in this
area of printer.

2. Remove the head cover by pressing the tabs in and pulling away from
the head. See Figure 56.
3. Place the toggle bar in neutral position (bar will extend equally from
both sides of head). This can be done manually - push on the extended
bar end. See Figure 60.
Figure 59: Head Components

Support side
idler wheel

Toggle spring

Model side
idler wheel
Heater shield

Toggle bar

-82

Drive wheel

Figure 60: Toggle bar in neutral position

4. Remove any excess material found around the head area.


NOTE: Material fed to the tip can sometimes jam causing a buildup of material under the head cover.
A. Clean out as much of the material as possible using needle
nose pliers, a probe, or equivalent tool.
CAUTION: The end of the tip where the material enters is called
the extrusion tube. Extrusion tubes are fragile. Use care when
working in this area so as to avoid damage to the tubes.
B. For easier access to areas that may need to be cleaned,
move the material idler wheels out of the way (there is one
idler wheel for support material and one for model
material, see Figure 59.
NOTE: Move only one idler wheel assembly at a time. Finish
cleaning around the moved wheel and restore it to its normal
position before moving the other idler wheel. Having both wheels
out of position simultaneously could stretch the spring.
i. Place a 7/64 T-Handle Allen wrench between the
toggle spring post and the idler wheel post as illustrated in
Figure 61. (model side shown).

-83

Figure 61: Create access space for cleaning - model side shown

Toggle
spring post
Idler wheel post

Position toggle
bar to same
side of head as
T-Handle.

ii.

Move idler wheel assembly by pushing with 7/64 inch


T-Handle Allen wrench against spring tension. Insert a
1/8 T-handled Allen wrench (from startup kit) into the
fixture hole. See Figure 62.

Figure 62: Holding access space open - model side shown

Insert 1/8 inch


T-Handle into
fixturing hole.

To create space, move Idler


assembly by pushing with 7/64
T-Handle Allen wrench against
spring tension.

-84

iii. Ease pressure on the 7/64 T-Handle Allen wrench to


carefully return the leveraged idler wheel back toward
its original position - until the idler assembly is resting
against the 1/8 T-Handle Allen wrench.
iv. Remove the 7/64 T-Handle Allen wrench.
C. Cut the material above the idler wheel using a cutters.
D. Clean the area that is now accessible using a needle nose
pliers, a probe or equivalent tool.
NOTE: Make sure that all loose material is removed from the
affected area.
E.

Reposition the 7/64 T-Handle Allen wrench between the


toggle spring post and the idler wheel post.

F.

Move idler wheel assembly by pushing with 7/64 inch THandle Allen wrench against spring tension and remove
the 1/8 T-handled Allen wrench.

G. Remove the 7/64 T-Handle Allen wrench.


5. Repeat for the opposite side as needed.
6. Replace the head cover.
NOTE: If the head cover is not replaced the printer may not function
properly.
7.

Press Done on the display panel.

8. Display will ask Which Materials Loaded? Press Model if only model
material is loaded, press Support if only support material is loaded or
press Both if both model and support material are still loaded. Press
None if neither are loaded.
9. Display will ask you to remove the carrier of the materials that are not
loaded. Remove the carrier and cut the excess material.
10. Press Done until back at Idle.
11. Reload the material that is not loaded.

-85

Service Troubleshooting
Revised 11/15/2010
1.0 How to use this Guide
2.0 Special Notes
3.0 Code Errors
4.0 Non-Code Errors
5.0 Connector Pinouts and Signals

1.0 How to use this Guide


1.

Determine what type of error you are experiencing; either a Code Error
or Non-Code Error.

2. If you experience a Code Error:


A. Refer to the Code Error Section of the guide (3.0 Code
Errors)
B. Match the code number with the number in the guide.
C. Follow the corrective actions to fix the error.
D. Complete and verify each step before proceeding to the
next step.
3. If you experience a Non- Code Error:
A. Refer to the Non-Code Error Section of the guide (4.0 NonCode Errors)
B. If the display on the machine displays an error message,
match that message to one of the non-error codes in the
guide.
C. If a message does not appear, match the problem to one of
the non-error codes in the guide.
D. Complete and verify each step before proceeding to the
next step.
4. If you have any suggestions, additions or changes that need to be made
to this guide please e-mail [email protected].

-86

2.0 Special Notes


A. Verify that the machine is plugged directly into a wall
outlet. Do not use an extension cord or power strip.
B. Verify you are running the current HP Designjet 3D
Software Solution and printer firmware. Upgrade the
software if necessary.
C. After "Power down" is complete, always shut the breaker
off to fully reset the system.
D. When measuring DC voltages and signals using chassis
ground is preferred. Do NOT measure AC voltages using
chassis ground.
E.

Check/reseat appropriate cables as part of the


troubleshooting process.

F.

Tera Term move commands are in inches.

G. Check limit switch states using the test points and/or LED's
on the power distribution board.
H. Replacement hard drive may take up to 45 minutes to boot.
The hard drive is running check disk (chkdsk).
I.

Ignore multiple error code listings at end of a CFG file (LE


output)

J.

Never "hotplug" the material bay cables. Doing so will


damage the material bay serial transceiver.

K. Correct seating of the I/O board to the power distribution


board is critical. Check for proper alignment through
electronics bay viewing window

-87

3.0 Code Errors


Major Codes
NOTE: These codes are displayed on the system LCD Display.
Code

Error

Definition/Recommendation

01

Unknown Error

No data on what error occurred. Cycle power.

02

PUC Error

Path, utilities and controller development library


(Used for software testing). Cycle power.

03

No Display

Process that runs LCD display generated error.


Cycle power.

04

Memory Error

Single board computer experienced memory error.


Cycle power.

05

LCD Display

Failed to write to LCD display board from SBC


(error will be seen in .cfg file).

1. Cycle power.
2. Replace LCD Display
06

LCD Keypad

Failed to read from LCD keypad to SBC (error will


be seen in .cfg file).

1. Cycle power.
2. Replace LCD Display
07

Manager Channel

Socket from manager internal manager process


was on, SBC (Software error, will not be
displayed). Cycle power.

08

Manager
Disconnected

Socket from manager internal manager process


was off, SBC (Software error, will not be
displayed)

09

Manager Send

Failed to send from manager (SBC) (Software


error)

10

Command Failed

Sent legal command that was rejected (exp. Move


Z command with door open). Cycle power.

11

Queue
Communication

Socket from queue process was interrupted


(broken) (Software error). Cycle power.

12

Joblog Message
Buffer

Failed to write to job log (Software error). Cycle


power.

13

Joblog File

Failed to create the job log (Software error). Cycle


power.

14

Controller Abort

Controller failure (See sub errors below)

15

Starting Up Failed

Some part of the start up procedure failed. Cycle


power.

15.1

Starting Up Failed

Verify controller is correctly gendered (gender is


the machine type) from the .CFG file. If not,
replace with a neutral gender board and perform
firmware upgrade.

16

Find Z Failed

Failed to find Z limit switch. Check for obstructions


or Z switch issues.

-88

Code

Error

Definition/Recommendation

17

Controller Load
Failed

Unable to load global parameters (Temp values,


flow control). Cycle power.

18

Temperature Failed to Liquefier or chamber failed to reach temperature


Regulate
within 7 min. See 18 error code below.

19

Controller
Initialization Failed

Controller failed to reboot or start. See detailed 19


error code section below.

20

Door Latch
Command Failed

See detailed non-error code section of this guide.

21

Ldrool Failed

Cycle power

22

Controller
Communications
Failed

Not used.

23

Universal Device
Name error

Cycle power

-89

Major Codes with Minor Codes


NOTE: Currently minor codes exist for major codes 14, 15 17-20,
22, & 23 only.

Controller Abort Minor Errors (Code: 14, XX)


Code

Description

Corrective Actions

14,01

Not Used

14,02

Report: Attempt to raise 1. Cycle power


modeling base sensor
2. Check to see if the toggle bar is broken.
failed
3. Check for obstructions preventing X or Y
movement
4. Check the substrate sensor bar is not
damaged. If so, replace bar.
5. Using LED's check to see if Z foam box
toggles when switch is activated. If not,
check foam sensor and/or Umbilical Cable.
6. Check for loose pins on J506-2, J506- 7,
J301-5, and J301-6. See Umbilical cable
diagram on page129.
7. Using LED's check to see Z home box
toggles when switch is activated. If not,
check Z home switch and/ lower harness J8
pins 1,11,12. See Lower harness on
page133.

14,03

Report: modeling base


sensor up when it
should be down.

1. Cycle power.
2. Check the substrate sensor assembly for free
operation.
3. Check to see if the sensor arm is broken.
4. Check connector J506, pins 2 and 7 on the
I/O card.
5. Using LED's check to see Z foam box
toggles when switch is activated. If not,
check substrate sensor, sensor assembly
and/or lower harness.

14,04

Report: modeling base


sensor down when it
should be up.

1. Push the sensor assembly up if it is down.


2. Check to see if the tip-wipe brush is set too
high.
3. Run the FZ command using Tera Term -Verify
the sensor is being pushed all the way up.
4. Remove, clean and reinstall the substrate
sensor assembly.

Not Used

-90

Code
14,05

14,06

14,07

14,08

14,09

14,10

Description
Abort : Unexpected
contact with X axis
home sensor.
Abort : Unexpected
contact with X axis EOT
sensor.
Abort : Unexpected
contact with Y axis
home sensor.
Abort : Unexpected
contact with Y axis EOT
sensor.

Corrective Actions
1. Power cycle the machine.
2. Check for an obstruction hitting the model.
3. Check to make sure the homing sensors are
clean.
4. Using LED's check if home & limit boxes are
lit. If so, check limit switches and/or
Umbilical Cable for X sensors, Y cable for
Y sensors.
5. Manually move the XY table in X and Y
checking for smooth operation.
6. Check belt tension.
7. Replace XY table. Failed bearings in the Y
drive shaft possible root cause

Abort : Unexpected
1. Check to see if the switch is operating
contact with Z axis
correctly using the LED/test points on the
home sensor.
PDB.
Abort : Unexpected
2. Check to see if there are any obstructions
contact with Z axis EOT
interfering with Z stage movement.
sensor.

14,11

Abort : Door opened


while axis in motion

14,13

Abort : Under Run at


1. Reprocess the part and send again.
vertex buffer
2. Reorient the STL and resend.
Abort : Under Run not in 3. If the frequency of the error is greater than
tool path
once every three months, then replace the
SBC or hard drive.

14,14

14,15

14,16

Report: Head motor


running without XY
motion

1. Check to see if door latch is activating using


LED's.
2. Check J504 pins 8 and 20 on the I/O card
for loose contacts or bent pins.
3. Look at LCD display, should show "Door
Open" when machine is idle and door is
open.
4. Using LED's check to see "Door Open"
toggles when switch is activated. If not,
check door switch and/or Mid-Unit
Harness.
5. Wiggle the door, make sure the sensor
reads the magnet with movement to the
door.
6. Check that the door magnet is present.

1. Software use only.

Abort : Vertex FIFO tail is 1. Communication error between controller


not on a 4 byte
board and the SBC - Power cycle system
boundary.
2. Reseat the controller board into SBC.
3. Replace controller board and/or SBC.

14,17

Abort : User abort.

1. Build was cancelled through the keypad.

14,18

Abort : User panic stop. 1. Will not be displayed on LCD (Opening


door during build can cause this error).

-91

Code

Description

Corrective Actions

14,19

Abort : Idle loop is slow. 1. Power cycle machine.


2. Escalate the case providing the .cfg file.

14,20

Abort : XY axis not


1. Power cycle machine.
ready.
2. Using the Tera Term, type SS. "X Axis
Abort : Z axis not ready.
Ready" should be displayed. If it is not
displayed, then type the "FH" & "FZ"
commands. Finally type "SS" again. If "X
Axis Ready" still is not displayed, then
replace the controller Board.

14,21

14,22

Abort : Head
temperature set-point
too low.

1. Reinstall printer firmware.


2. Verify the head temperature set point using
HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software.

The model must be above 240


degrees.

The support must be above 240


degrees.

14,23

Report: Begin curve


parameters not in
sequence.

14,24

Abort : X axis command 1. Power cycle machine.


error (PMD error)
2. If error continues - possible memory
Abort : Y axis command
problem, replace SBC.
error (PMD error)
3. If the frequency of the error is greater than
Abort : Z axis command
once every three months, replace the
error (PMD error)
controller board.

14,25
14,26
14,27
14,28
14,29

Abort : X axis motion


error (PMD error)
Abort : Y axis motion
error (PMD error)
Abort : Z axis motion
error (PMD error)

1. Communication error between controller


board & SBC - Cycle power
2. Reseat the controller board into SBC.
3. Replace controller board and/or SBC.

1. Power cycle machine.


2. If the frequency of the error is greater than
once every three months, replace the
controller board.

14,30

Abort : PMD axis


1. Power cycle machine.
command was not X, Y, 2. Reinstall printer firmware.
or Z.

14,31

Abort : Move absolute


error.

1. Check and reseat connectors to the X and Y


motors.
2. Check home and EOT switches for correct
operation. Replace if defective.

14,32

Abort : PMD checksum


error.

1. Power cycle machine.


2. Reinstall printer firmware.
3. If the frequency of the error is greater than
once every three months, replace the
controller board.

-92

Code

Description

Corrective Actions

14,33

Abort : Invalid being


send to PMD chip.

1. Power cycle machine.


2. Reinstall printer firmware.
3. If the frequency of the error is greater than
once every three months, replace the
controller board.

14,34

Abort : Z axis table


jammed

Not used on HP Designjet 3D printers.

14,35

Report: Time out while


loading carrier.

1. See Load Failed Section (K) in the Non-Error


Code Section.

14,36

Report: Modeling
1. Check and reseat J506 and check pins 2, 3,
material not moving in
7 and 8.
head.
2. If error continues, replace the controller
Report: Support material
board.
not moving in head.

14,37
14,38

Abort : Hardware turned 1. Check and reseat connectors to controller


off power supply.
board and PDB.
2. Replace the controller board.
3. Replace the PDB.
4. Replace umbilical cable.
5. Jumper the WDT to retrieve CFG to find
additional errors.

14,39

Abort : Head
thermocouple fault.

1. Verify ambient temperature is above 18 C


(64.4 F).
2. Check thermocouple wire for damage.
3. Using a meter, check to see if thermocouple
is open at head.
4. Check/reseat the connectors on the head
board.
5. Open may be in umbilical head cable.
Check and reseat J505 and check pins 7
and 17 on the I/O card.
6. Check and reseat J7 and check pins 7 and
10 on the T/C amp board.
7. Replace the toggle head assembly.
8. Replace TC Amp board.

14,40

Abort : Chamber
thermocouple fault.

1. Verify ambient temperature is above 18 C


(64.4 F).
2. Check to see if chamber thermocouple is
plugged in to the PDB.
3. Using a meter check if thermocouple is
open. If so, replace thermocouple.
4. Check chamber thermocouple and wire for
damage.
5. Verify chamber fans are on. If not on
replace 24VDC power supply.
6. Replace chamber thermocouple.
7. Replace power distribution board.

-93

Code
14,41

14,42
14,43

14,44

14,47

14,45

14,46

Description

Corrective Actions

Abort : Motion
command while door
open.
Abort : Load cartridge
while door open.
Abort : Modeling
command while door
open
Abort : Select head
command while door
open.
Abort : Tip wipe
command while door
open.

1. Check to see if door latch is activating using


LED's.
2. Check J504 pins 8 and 20 on the I/O card
for loose contacts or bent pins.
3. Look at LCD display, should show "Door
Open" when machine is idle and door is
open.
4. Using LED's check to see "Door Open"
toggles when switch is activated. If not,
check door switch and/or Mid-Unit
Harness.
5. Wiggle the door, make sure the sensor
reads the magnet with movement to the
door.
6. Check that the door magnet is present.

Report: Unable to write


to model material guide
tube.
Report: Unable to write
to support material
guide tube.

1. Try a different material spool.


2. Clean contacts on carrier and material bay
with an eraser.
3. Replace carrier.
4. Replace material bay.

14,48

Abort : Vertex command 1. If this message is displayed on LCD ONLY,


error.
possible memory problem, replace SBC. If
this message is not displayed on the LCD,
(seen in cfg file), RAM is NOT the root
cause.
2. If the frequency of the error is greater than
once every three months, replace the
controller board.

14,49

Internal : PCode Error,


Bad Curve.

This error will not be displayed. Software


development use only.

14,50

Internal : PCode Error,


DY within curve.

This error will not be displayed. Software


development use only.

14,51

Abort : Model material 1. Reload material.


not loaded.
Note:
Abort : Support material
System is not recognizing that material is
not loaded.
loaded.
Abort : Model head
motor not ready.
Abort : Support head
motor not ready.

14,52
14,53
14,54

-94

Code
14,55

14,56

14,57
14,58

14,59

14,60

14,61
14,62

14,63
14,64

Description

Corrective Actions

Abort : Find home


failed, X home and X
eot both on
Abort : Find home
failed, Y home and Y
eot both on

1. Power cycle machine - remember to move


head away from switches.
2. X errors - Check pins and reseat connector
J505 on the I/O Board. Y errors - Check
pins and reseat connector J503 on the I/O
Board.
3. Using LED's check to see if switch state
toggles. If not, check sensor and/or
umbilical cable for X and Y cable for Y.
4. Replace the head board for X errors and
replace the Y sensors for Y.

Abort : Find home


failed, X home timeout
Abort : Find home
failed, Y home timeout

1. Power cycle machine - remember to move


head away from switches.
2. If chatter in motor, check motor and/or
motor cable for Y, umbilical cable for X.
3. Check for obstacles obstructing X or Y
movement.
4. Using LED's check to see that the state
changes when sensor is activated. If not,
check sensor and/or umbilical cable for X
and Y cable for Y.

Abort : Find home


failed, X home not
tripped
Abort : Find home
failed, Y home not
tripped

1. Power cycle machine - remember to move


head away from switches.
2. Using LED's check to see home toggles
when sensor is activated. If not, check
sensor and/or Umbilical Cable for X and Y
cable for Y.
3. X errors - Check pins and reseat connector
J505 on the I/O Card. Y errors - Check
pins and reseat connector J503 on the I/O
Card.

Abort : Find home


failed, X home tripped
Abort : Find home
failed, Y home tripped

1. Power cycle machine - remember to move


head away from switches.
2. Using LED's check to see home box toggles
when sensor is activated. If not, check
sensor and/or umbilical cable for X , Y
cable for Y.
3. X errors - Check pins and reseat connector
J505 on the I/O Card. Y errors - Check
pins and reseat connector J503 on the I/O
Card.

Abort : Find home


failed, X eot tripped
Abort : Find home
failed, Y eot tripped

1. Power cycle machine - remember to move


head away from switches.
2. Using LED's check to see home box toggles
when sensor is activated. If not, check
sensor and/or umbilical cable for X , Y
cable for Y.
1. X errors - Check pins and reseat connector
J505 on the I/O Card. Y errors - Check
pins and reseat connector J503 on the I/O
Card.

-95

Code
14,65
14,66

Description

Corrective Actions

Abort : Find home


1. Power cycle machine - remember to move
failed, X eot not tripped
head away from switches.
Abort : Find home
2. Using LED's check to see home box toggles
failed, Y eot not tripped
when sensor is activated. If not, check
sensor and/or umbilical cable for X , Y
cable for Y.
3. X errors - Check pins and reseat connector
J505 on the I/O Card. Y errors - Check
pins and reseat connector J503 on the I/O
Card.

14,67

Abort : Head
temperature too high

1. Verify the TC and Liquefier Heaters are


plugged in properly.
2. Check umbilical is connected properly.
3. TC Amp board is bad. Replace TC Amp
Board.
4. Head board is bad. Replace head board.
5. Replace the umbilical cable.

14,68

Abort: Illegal PMD


Command

1. If error occurs more than once a month


replace the controller board.

14,69

Abort: XY PMD Read


Checksum error

1. If error occurs more than once a month


replace the controller board.

14,70

Abort: XY PMD Write


Checksum error

1. If error occurs more than once a month


replace the controller board.

14,71

Abort: Z PMD Read


Checksum error

1. If error occurs more than once a month


replace the controller board.

14,72

Abort: Z PMD Write


Checksum error

1. If error occurs more than once a month


replace the controller board.

14,73

Abort: Head TC Board


Configuration error

Not used on HP Designjet 3D printers.

14,74

Unexpected contact with 1. Power cycle machine - remember to move


unknown limit.
head away from switches.
2. Using LED's check to see limit box toggles
when switch is activated. If not, check
switch and/or umbilical cable for X, Y
cable for Y.
3. X errors - Check pins and reseat connector
J505 on the I/O Card. Y errors - Check
pins and reseat connector J503 on the I/O
Card.

14,75

Unknown

No error code associated with an error.

14,76

Software bug

1. Cycle power.

14,77

Buffer is larger than the 1. Cycle power.


data
2. Replace single board computer.
Buffer is smaller than the 3. Replace controller board.
data

14,78

-96

Code

Description

Corrective Actions

14,79

Run-time error

1. Cycle power.
2. Check .cfg File for other errors.
3. Replace single board computer.
4. Replace controller board.

14,80

Index out of bounds

1. Cycle power.

14,81

Invalid argument

1. Cycle power.

14,82

Invalid channel

1. Cycle power.

14,83

Invalid command

1. Cycle power.

14,84

Invalid command
opCode

1. Cycle power.

14,85

The operation is not


implemented

Software error; will not be displayed.

14,86

Timeout

1. Cycle power.
2. Replace controller board.

14,87

Resource already in use 1. Cycle power.

14,88

The dual-port memory is 1. Cycle power.


corrupted

14,89

No valid ISR callback


routine set

1. Cycle power.

14,90

An internal queue has


overflowed

1. Cycle power.

14,91

Address not properly


aligned

1. Cycle power.

14,92

Message too big for


queue

1. Cycle power.

14,93

Data unit size violation

1. Cycle power.

14,94

Checksum bad

1. Cycle power.
2. Check 5/12 VDC power (5 and 12VDC
LEDs will repeatedly dim). Replace 5/12
VDC power supply.
3. If error code is displayed again within 3
months, replace controller board.

14,95

PMD Host IO Error

1. Cycle power.

14,96

Unidentified interrupt
occurred

1. Cycle power.

14,97

Invalid data type

1. Cycle power.

14,98

Find home failed, X EOT 1. Power cycle machine - remember to move


timeout
head away from switches.
Find home failed, Y EOT 2. Using LED's check to see limit box toggles
timeout
when switch is activated. If not, check
switch and/or umbilical cable for X, Y
cable for Y.
3. X errors - Check pins and reseat connector
J505 on the I/O board. Y errors - Check
pins and reseat connector J503 on the I/O
Card.

14,99

-97

Code
14,100

Description

Corrective Actions

Find home failed, Z


HOME (BOT) not
tripped
Find home failed, Z EOT
not tripped
Find home failed, Z
HOME (BOT) timeout
Find home failed, Z EOT
timeout

1. Check for objects/parts on Z stage and


around lead screw.
2. Cycle power.
3. Check Z Home and Z EOT LED's on PDB to
verify state changes correctly. If not, check
connector P8 on the PDB and Z switches.
Replace cable and/or switches.
4. Replace Z axis motor and lead screw.
5. 14.101 error only - Check 5/12 VDC power
(5 and 12VDC LEDs will repeatedly dim)
Replace 5/12 VDC power supply.

14,104

Surface not found

1. No modeling base.
2. Modeling base is used/defective, has low
spot. Replace Modeling base.
3. Verify substrate sensor is working. If not,
replace Substrate Sensor.

14,105

Controller not ready to


build a model

1. Cycle power.

14,106

BOT offset is higher than 1. Use HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software to


the BOT switch
zero the Z offset value.
2. Run tip Z calibration.
3. Check Z home sensor.

14,107

End model command


while not modeling

Software error; will not be displayed.

14,108

Operation was killed

Software error; will not be displayed.

Out of memory

Software error; will not be displayed.

14,101
14,102
14,103

14,109
14,110

Cartridge communication 1. Replace material spool.


error
2. Replace material carrier.
3. Replace material bay.

14,111

Invalid frame check


sequence

14,112

EEPROM communication Software error; will not be displayed.


error

14,113

Door not latched

1. Verify chamber fans are operational. If not


replace 24VDC power supply.
2. Inspect solenoid and wiring.
3. Replace solenoid.
4. Replace PDB.

14,114

Thermocouple snap
switch tripped

Not used on HP Designjet 3D printers.

14,115

Z stage planarity beyond 1. Replace modeling base.


tolerance
2. Re-level XY table.

14,116

I2C configuration info is


corrupt

1. Cycle power.
2. If error repeats, replace controller board.

Software error; will not be displayed.

-98

Code

Description

Corrective Actions

14,117

A command failed while 1. Download CFG file - check error code


modeling
details.
2. Toggle failure - reference 14,129.
3. Check and reseat connectors/pins on J506
on the I/O card and J301 on the head
board.
4. Replace Toggle Head assembly.
5. Replace PDB (U8 chip failure).

14,118

Invalid cyclic redundancy Software error; will not be displayed


check

14,119

Operation already active Software error; will not be displayed

14,120

Invalid vector detected

1. Reprocess the part and send again.


2. Reorient part and send again.
3. If the frequency of the error is greater than
once every three months, then replace the
SBC or hard drive.

14,121

Processor Exception

1. Cycle power.

14,122

Processor halted

1. Cycle power.

14,123

Watchdog timeout

1. Cycle power.
2. Check all cable connections including
thermocouples.
3. Escalate the case providing .cfg file.

14,124

Stack overflow

1. Cycle power.
2. If problem persists, replace controller board.

14,125

Runtime error

1. Cycle power.

14,126

Operation active - try


again

1. Cycle power.

14,127

Invalid gender

1. Cycle power.
2. If problem persists, replace controller board.

14,128

Invalid platform

1. Cycle power.
2. If problem persists, replace controller board.

-99

Code

Description

Corrective Actions

14,129

Toggle Head failure

1. Check physical position of head at failure.


2. Ensure toggle bar aligns with toggle stops.
3. Inspect top layer of model for part shift.
4. If any of above indicate a failure, Cycle
Power and resend part.
5. Remove head cover, Verify that you can
manually toggle the head. and check
liquefier inlets for excessive material build
up. Remove if present.
6. Check and reseat connectors/pins on J506
on the I/O card and J301 on the Head
Board.
7. Reseat toggle connector on the Head Board.
8. Check Model and Support Toggle LED's on
PDB. Verify high and low states.
On head board for toggle signal:
TP201-Model; TP101-Support
9. Using Tera Term run AH to toggle the head.
Monitor system movement to help determine
root cause of issue.
10. Replace Toggle Sensor Board.
11. Replace Head Board.
12. Replace Toggle Head assembly.

14,130

Temperature setback is
active

1. Cycle power.

14,131

Toggle when head motor 1. Check Model and Support Toggle LED's on
is running
PDB. Verify high and low states.
On head board for toggle signal: TP201Model; TP101-Support
2. Reseat connectors on the Head Board.
3. Replace Toggle Sensor Board.
4. Replace Head Board.
5. Replace Umbilical Cable.

14,132

UPS low power

1. UPS is shutting down. Check UPS and AC


power.

-100

Code
14,133

Description

Corrective Actions

Head liquefier is not


heating up

1. Liquefier T/C may be crushed. Test using


meter.
If crushed, reading will be 0 Ohms
between pin 1 and ground.
2. If head board with LEDs is present, check
model and support 120VDC LEDs at head
board.
If both model (upper) and support (lower)
LEDs are illuminated, head heater is bad.
Replace head.
If only the model LED (lower) is illuminated, replace the 120VDC power supply
If only the support LED (upper) is illuminated, replace the power distribution
board
3. If head board with LEDs is not present, use
volt meter to check for 120 VDC at head
board.
If 120VDC present at both model and
support side, heater is bad. Replace
head.
If no 120VDC at support side, replace
120VDC power supply.
If no 120VDC at model side, replace
power distribution board.
4. The umbilical cable to the heater is broken
or has a bad connector.
5. Make sure the machine is plugged directly
into a wall outlet.
6. Check the thermocouple connectors, heater
connectors.
7. Verify that hard drive has not lost its .CAL
values. If values are lost, download .CAL
files.

14,134

Invalid packet size

Software use only

14,135

Initialization failure

1. See LE (List Errors) output at end of CFG File.

14,136

Invalid state for


1. Cycle power.
operation
2. Reinstall upgrade.
Attempt to program
firmware when system is
not in upgrade mode.

14,137

MCB Communication
error.
Failure in command/
response protocol with
MCB.

1. Power Off.
2. Check/Replace MCB cables (Reseat while
powered down).
3. Power On.
4. Reload material.
5. Replace carrier.
6. Use LE command with Tera Term.
7. Replace material bay.

-101

Code

Description

Corrective Actions

14,138

MCB Firmware error:


Error upgrading
firmware.
(possibly mismatched
firmware/hardware
versions)

1. Cycle power.
2. Reinstall upgrade.

14,139

MCB not present : No


MCB available on the
system.
WARNING: Always
power down system
completely before
connecting or
disconnecting the
Material Bay Cables.

1. Power down.
2. Reseat material bay cables.
3. Replace material bay cables.
4. Replace material bay.
5. Replace PDB or controller board.
6. Replace 24VDC power supply.

14,140

1. Cycle power.
MCB end of filament
event.
End of filament detected
when loading carrier.

14,141

MCB filament loaded


event.
Attempted to retract
filament while it is
loaded in the head.

14,142

Auto purge detect failure. Software use only.


Failed to detect any
material purge after
loading.

14,143

Model filament not


present at EOF switch.
Currently unused.

Software use only.

14,144

Support filament not


present at EOF switch.
Currently unused.

Software use only.

14,145

Model filament not


present at FP switch.
Currently unused.

Software use only.

14,146

Support filament not


present at FP switch.
Currently unused.

Software use only.

1. Cycle power.

-102

Starting Up Failed Minor Errors (15.XX)


Code
15,01
15,02

Description
Startup state activation
failed
Timeout period expired
while starting up

Corrective Actions
Software use only
1. See CFG file for additional error details.
2. Replacement controller board or hard drive
is gendered incorrectly.
3. If printer is in Dynamic Mode:
a. Issue may be a network timeout due to
improper DHCP settings on the
network. Verify by looking at CFG, if
code reads:
- MASTER logger: Punching nameserver
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx through the firewall.
b. If using printer firmware version 2230
try workaround. Contact CS for
workaround instructions.
c. Upgrade printer firmware to a version
newer than 2230.
4. Material Bay Connection timeout. Refer to
error code 14,139.

Controller Load Failed Minor Errors (17.XX)


Code

Description

Corrective Actions

17,01

LG_COMMAND Failed on Controller

Software use only.

17,02

LG_COMMAND Timeout

Software use only.

Temperature Failed to Regulate Minor Errors (18.XX)

-103

Code

Description

Corrective Actions

18,01

Temperature not
changing fast
enough.

1. Status-Details: Check to see if current envelope


temperature is above 72C before starting a
model.
2. Status--Details: Check to see if envelope
temperature set point is 77C. If not, toggle power
switch.
3. Check heaters, chamber fans, and heater cables.
4. Check AC input. Verify that no extension cords or
power strips are attached to the system.
5. Check AC output from PDB to chamber heaters.
Check AC cables. Replace PDB.
6. See error codes 14-39, 14-40, 14-133.

Chamber is slow
to heat up.

Liquefier wont
heat up (its cold).

1. Liquefier T/C may be crushed. Test using meter. If


crushed, reading will be 0 Ohms between pin 1
and ground.
Use HP Designjet
2.
If
head board with LEDs is present, check model
3D Diagnostic
and support 120VDC LEDs at head board.
Software to check
to see if the temp
If both model (upper) and support (lower) LEDs
is going over
are illuminated, head heater is bad. Replace
90C. If temp is
head.
above 90C go to
If only the model LED (lower) is illuminated,
next section
replace the 120VDC power supply
If only the support LED (upper) is illuminated,
replace the power distribution board
3. If head board with LEDs is not present, use volt
meter to check for 120 VDC at head board.
If 120VDC present at both model and support
side, heater is bad. Replace head.
If no 120VDC at support side, replace
120VDC power supply.
If no 120VDC at model side, replace power
distribution board.
4. The umbilical cable to the heater is broken or has
a bad connector.
5. Check AC input. Verify that no extension cords or
power strips are attached to the system.
6. Check that DL18 on the PDB is lit. If not 120VDC
circuit maybe bad - replace PDB.
7. Monitor DL23 (M) and DL24 (S). LED's should turn
on when head is commanded to heat. If not lit check 120VDC, if absent replace PDB (model) or
120VDC AUX (support).
8. Check the thermocouple and heater connectors.
Liquefier is warm
but doesn't reach
operating
temperature.

1. Check AC input. Verify that no extension cords or


power strips are attached to the system.
2. Liquefier heater has high resistance, should be
175 to 216 ohms. If incorrect replace head.
3. The umbilical cable has an intermittent
connection. Replace Umbilical Cable.
4. Replace the Head Board.

-104

Code

Description

Corrective Actions

18,01

Chamber
temperature too
high (over 77
degrees)

1. Chamber TC has failed. Replace chamber TC.


2. Chamber temperature offset is incorrect. Correctly
set at 77 degrees using HP Designjet 3D
Diagnostic Software. See Temperatures on
page428.

18,02

Temperature failed 1. Status--Details: Check to see if head temperature


to regulate within
set point is 310C for model and 300C for
7 degrees.
support.
2. Check Liquefier Thermocouple wire and/or
Heater wires.
3. Check for torn or damaged insulation on the
liquefier, especially at the tip.
4. Check head T/C and umbilical cable for a loose
connection. Replace umbilical cable.

18,03

Incorrect model
1. Using HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software, set
head temperature.
model temperature to default of 310C.
2. See also 18,01.

18,04

Incorrect support 1. Using HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software, set


head temperature.
support temperature to default of 300C.

18,05

Incorrect chamber 1. Using HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software, set


temperature.
chamber temperature to default of 77C.

-105

Controller Initialization Failed Minor Errors (19.XX)


Code

Description

Corrective Actions

19,01

IN_COMMAND Rejected by
Controller.

Software use only

19,02

IN_COMMAND Timeout.

1. Cycle power.
2. Replace controller board.
3. Replace hard drive.

Door Unlatch Failed (20.XX)


Code

Description

Corrective Actions

20,01
20,02

Unlatch command rejected.


Timeout period expired waiting
for head to stop.

1. Check door latch solenoid wiring.


2. Check ability of door to latch

Controller Communications Failed Sub Errors (22.XX)


Code

Description

Corrective Actions

22,01
22,02

FC_SERVICE event not received.


Insufficient material to complete job.

Not used on HP Designjet 3D


printers

Universal Device Name Error (23.XX)


Code

Description

Corrective Actions

23,01
23,02

UDN controller command failed.


UDN controller command timed
out.

1. Check network for connectivity.


2. Cycle power.

-106

4.0 Non-Code Errors


A. Build Error displayed on LCD
B. Tip Depth Incorrect
C. Corrupted Upgrade displayed on LCD
D. Carrier Invalid or Empty displayed on LCD
E.

Door Latch

F.

Door Open displayed on LCD

G. Download
H. Loss of Extrusion (LOE)
I.

Lights

J.

Material/Unload Error (failed to load/unload material)

K. Network Communications
L.

Pauses during build

M. Power Up/Boot
N. Cant Find Home - Check Modeling Base displayed on
LCD
O. Power Down
P.

System VERY slow to reach temperature

Q. Calibration issues
R. Z Calibration failure
S. Noise
A. "Build Error" displayed on LCD
1. Part stops building before
complete.

1. Partial or bad model file sent to unit. - Check


and reprocess the STL and redownload

B. Tip depth is incorrect


1. Tip Depth is wrong (too deep 1. Run Z tip calibration.
or above the modeling
2. Check and/or clean the Z foam sensor.
base)
3. Replace the Z foam assembly and sensor

C. "Corrupted Upgrade" Displayed on LCD


1. Verify the printer firmware CD is the correct
gender. (Same as the system)
2. Cycle power and try download again. If not
possible or fails again replace hard drive.
3. Verify the hard drive and the controller board
are gendered correctly.

-107

D. "Carrier Invalid or Empty" Displayed on LCD


1. Remove and reinsert the carrier.
2. Spool e-prom empty or failed. Load a different
spool.
3. Try a different Carrier
4. Replace material bay

E. Door Latch
1. Door doesnt latch/unlatch.

1. Door is misaligned, adjust door hinge brackets.


2. Upper harness cable to solenoid is unplugged
or open.
3. Door solenoid mounting bracket is loose or
damaged. Replace mounting bracket.
4. Door solenoid has failed. Check by toggling
using HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software.
Replace solenoid.
5. PDB has failed (won't latch only).

F. "Door Open" Displayed on LCD


1. Door doesnt latch/unlatch.

1. The door is open. Close the door.


2. Verify the magnet mounted to door frame is not
misaligned or missing.
3. Door is misaligned, adjust door hinge
brackets.
4. Door switch is bad, replace door switch.

G. Download
1.

Model sent to system,


but did not appear in
queue.

1. Verify the IP address on the printer and in HP


Designjet 3D Software Solution match.
2. Send the file again. Check the lower status bar
in HP Designjet 3D Software Solution for error
messages.
3. Reprocess and send the file again.
4. Remove special characters from CMB file name.
5. Cycle power on both the system and the work
station.
6. Downloading starts but fails during download
process. External or internal network cable
bad. Try different network cable or replace
pigtail (internal) network cable.

-108

Remove head cover and inspect


liquefier inlet

No

No

Is there a short
piece of filament in
the liquefier inlet?

1. Filament Missing at Drive


Wheel

Are both filaments


present at drive
wheel?

Yes

Yes

No

2. Filament Tail Left at


Liquefier Inlet

Is there excess
material inside the
head?

6. Excess Material Inside Head

Enter head maintenance and try


to extrude

Did both filaments


extrude?

No

3. Filament Present but


Won't Extrude

No

4. Intermittent LOE

Yes

Yes

Did model or
support features
fall over?

Yes

5. Part Geometry Failure

H. Loss of Extrusion (LOE)


Use flow chart to determine type of LOE, then follow the steps below.
1. Filament Missing at Drive Wheel 1. Verify that filament tube is connected at all
junctions.
- Filament tube disconnected
2.
High
pull force on the material spool.
- Filament pulled back
a. Verify spool lid is inserted properly and
not rubbing on carrier.
b. Remove any debris from bottom of
carrier.
c. Filament is tangled on spool. Replace
spool.
3. High pull force in filament tubes.
a. Inspect filament tubes and Y block for
debris. Remove debris.
b. Inspect for kinked filament tubes.
Replace filament tubes.
c. Check for twisted feed tubes in energy
chain. If twisted, replace filament
tubes.

-109

1. Filament Tail Left at Liquefier


Inlet
- Broken Filament
- Undetected EOF

1. Verify that filament tube is connected at all


junctions.
2. High pull force on the material spool.
a. Verify spool lid is inserted properly and
not rubbing on carrier.
b. Remove any debris from bottom of
carrier.
c. Filament is tangled on spool. Replace
spool.
3. High pull force in filament tubes.
a. Inspect filament tubes and Y block for
debris. Remove debris.
b. Inspect for kinked filament tubes.
Replace filament tubes.
c. Check for twisted feed tubes in energy
chain. If twisted, replace filament
tubes.
4. System did not detect end of filament (EOF).
Cycle power. If repeats, verify FP switch
functions properly. Replace material bay if
defective.

-110

2. Filament Present but Won't


Extrude
- Spin out
- Head Motor Doesn't turn

1. High pull force on the material spool.


a. Verify spool lid is inserted properly and
not rubbing on carrier.
b. Remove any debris from bottom of
carrier.
c. Filament is tangled on spool. Replace
spool.
2. High pull force in filament tubes.
a. Inspect filament tubes and Y block for
debris. Remove debris.
b. Inspect for kinked filament tubes.
Replace filament tubes.
c. Check for twisted feed tubes in energy
chain. If twisted, replace filament
tubes.
3. Inspect model for excessive overfill.
a. Toolpaths should not overlap by more
than 50%. If so, reorient and
reprocess STL.
b. If model curl has caused the part to
contact the tip, reprocess part with less
dense fill. Re-run tip Z cal if part is
separating from supports
4. Check for loose heater block clamp screws.
5. Plugged Liquefier - replace tips.
6. Check idler wheel gap.
7. Check liquefier alignment.
8. Head idler spring is deformed or installed
improperly. Replace head idler spring.
9. Possible head temperature issue
a. Replace head board and TC Amp
board.
b. Replace toggle head assembly.
10. Head motor power wires or encoder
failure - replace toggle head
11. In case of Z shift:
a. Realign Z guide rods. See Installing
the Z stage on page327.
b. Replace Z motor and leadscrew.
c. Replace Z assembly.

-111

3. Intermittent LOE
- Head Motor
- Intermittent tip plug

1. Check for loose heater block clamp screws.


2. Make sure the head connectors are seated
properly.
3. Check air plenum for: proper hose
connection; properly seating; cracks or
damage.
4. Check to make sure head blower fan hose
is connected to blower.
5. If extrusion fails on first layer
a. If using a used modeling base, retry
with a new one
b. Rerun Z calibration
6. Plugged Liquefier - replace tips.
7. Inspect model for excessive overfill.
a. Toolpaths should not overlap by more
than 50%. If so, reorient and
reprocess STL.
b. If model curl has caused the part to
contact the tip, reprocess part with less
dense fill. Re-run tip Z cal if part is
separating from supports
8. Check idler wheel gap.
9. Check liquefier alignment.
10. Head idler spring is deformed or installed
improperly. Replace head idler spring.
11. Possible head temperature issue
a. Replace head board and TC Amp
board.
b. Replace toggle head assembly.
12. Head motor power wires or encoder
failure - replace toggle head
13. Blower fan not supplying enough air flow weak or stalling. Replace fan.
14. Replace umbilical cable
15. Replace controller board
16. In case of Z shift:
a. Realign Z guide rods.
b. Replace Z motor and leadscrew.
c. Replace Z assembly.

4. Part Geometry Failure


1. Reorient, reprocess and resubmit the part
- Model or support features fell 2. Run Z calibration
over
3. Replace tip shields and tip wipe assembly
4. If part has shifted in X or Y, refer to part
quality section, part shift subsection.
5. In case of Z shift:
a. Realign Z guide rods.
b. Replace Z motor and leadscrew.
c. Replace Z assembly.

-112

5. Excess Material Inside Head


1. Check for loose heater block clamp screws.
- Filament Buckled / Spaghetti 2. Make sure the head connectors are seated
Head
properly.
- Encased Head
3. Check air plenum for: proper hose
connection; properly seating; cracks or
damage.
4. Check to make sure head blower fan hose
is connected to blower.
5. If extrusion fails on first layer with a used
modeling base, retry with a new one
6. Rerun Z calibration
7. Plugged Liquefier - replace tips.
8. Inspect model for excessive overfill.
a. Toolpaths should not overlap by more
than 50%. If so, reorient and
reprocess STL.
b. If model curl has caused the part to
contact the tip, reprocess part with less
dense fill. Re-run tip Z cal if part is
separating from supports
c. If part curl continues, see part curl
section
9. Check idler wheel gap.
10. Check liquefier alignment.
11. Head idler spring is deformed or installed
improperly. Replace head idler spring.
12. Possible head temperature issue
a. Replace head board and TC Amp
board.
b. Replace toggle head assembly.
13. Head motor power wires or encoder
failure - replace toggle head
14. Blower fan not supplying enough air flow weak or stalling. Replace fan.
15. Replace umbilical cable
16. Replace controller board
17. In case of Z shift:
a. Realign Z guide rods.
b. Replace Z motor and leadscrew.
c. Replace Z assembly.
6. Filament motor is running very
fast.

1. Make sure the head connectors are seated


properly.
2. Bad motor. Replace toggle head assembly.
3. Broken wire in the umbilical cable. Replace
umbilical cable.

-113

I. Lights
Chamber lights won't come on or
are dim. (Unit is otherwise
functioning normally)

1. Check and reseat connectors to the light bar.


2. Swap light bars to determine whether bad
light bar or bad cable.
3. Lights are burnt out - replace light bars.
4. Light bar cable is bad - replace cable.

J. Material/Unload Error
1. Material Error
Filament error

1. Remove the carrier and verify material is


coming out of the material guide.
2. Verify material pulls freely from the carrier.
3. Verify the material tubes are free of material
4. Reload material.

2. Material Error
Filament blocked

1. Remove carrier and verify material pulls freely


from carrier.
2. Verify the material tubes are free of material.
3. Reload material.

3. Material Error
Carrier invalid

1. Remove carrier and verify it is not empty.


2. Replace material spool.

4. Material Error
Filament broken

1. Remove the carrier and verify material is


coming out of the material guide.
2. Verify material pulls freely from the carrier.
3. Verify the material tubes are free of material

5. Load Error
Filament blocked

1. Remove the carrier and verify material is


coming out of the material guide.
2. Verify material pulls freely from the carrier.
3. Verify the material tubes are free of material

6. Load Error
Purge failed

1. Remove the carrier and verify material is


coming out of the material guide.
2. Verify material pulls freely from the carrier.
3. Verify the material tubes are free of material
4. Check for and clear any excess material build
up around the tips.
5. Material may be jammed in head. See
Material Jam on page80..

7. Unload Error
Unload failed

1. Remove the carrier and verify the material


tubes are free of material.

8. Filament does not reach


filament present switch.

1. Filament is being cut off too long at carrier.


Less than 1/4" should be exposed
2. Filament slipped into guide tube. Make sure
filament extends to the end of the guide tube.
3. High pull force spool, refer to "filament slips
at head" under LOE section.
4. Possible bad drive motor, replace material
bay.

-114

9. Carrier failed to load after


three tries.

1. Carrier is defective (e.g. material jammed in


carrier, worn drive wheel). Replace
2. Carrier is empty. Replace carrier.
3. Filament left in head or needs to be cleaned.
4. Load solenoid or motor not working. Check
connections to motor/solenoid.
5. Filament is being cut off too long at carrier.
Less than 1/4" should be exposed.
6. Filament guide tubes are kinked or bad.
Replace filament tubes.
7. Head filament motor not running. Verify that
motor runs though head maintenance.
8. Filament guides are out of alignment with
motor blocks. See Liquefier Alignment on
page397.

10. "Load Failed" is displayed


shortly after hitting "Load"

1. Check that the Z stage is not hitting the lower


Z limit switch. Manually raise the Z stage
several inches above the lower Z limit switch.
2. Reload material.

11. Filament makes it to drive


wheel pinch point but
"Material Error" is
displayed.

1. Retry loading material


2. Perform the drive wheel alignment procedure
3. Idler wheel stuck on axle. Realign idler wheel.
If wheel remains stuck replace toggle.
4. Check that pivot block spring is mounted on
the pivot blocks, not the idler wheel shafts.
5. Check idler wheel stop adjustment.
6. Replace tips.

12. Filament makes it to drive


wheel pinch point but does
NOT purge.

1. Retry loading material


2. Perform the drive wheel alignment procedure
3. Idler wheel stuck on axle. Realign idler wheel.
If wheel remains stuck replace toggle.
4. Check that pivot block spring is mounted on
the pivot blocks, not the idler wheel shafts.
5. Check idler wheel stop adjustment.
6. Replace tips.

-115

K. Network Communication
1. System boots, but won't talk to 1. If using static - Wrong IP address, check that
network.
IP in machine and HP Designjet 3D Software
Solution are the same.
2. If using static - Make sure the IP address is
static on the customer's network.
3. If using static - Verify IP address and netmask
are correct with IT administrator.
4. Switch from static network to dynamic
network or vice versa.
5. Network Internal (Pigtail) cable bad. Plug
network cable directly into SBC to test.
6. Network interface on SBC has failed - green
LED on SBC should blink when system is
pinged, or green LED stays on when network
cable is unplugged. Replace the SBC.
7. OS on hard drive maybe corrupt - replace the
hard drive.
2. Cannot communicate using a 1. From Control Panel open the Firewall Client
Options dialog box, uncheck the box that
crossover cable with XP
says "Enable Firewall Client".
Microsoft Small Business
2. If using static - verify IP address, Netmask and
Server adds a piece of
default gateway are correct on workstation
software called Firewall
and printer.

Client. This must be turned


off.

-116

L. Pauses During Build


1. Chamber won't heat up to
at least - 77 degrees

2. Head not maintaining


temperature.

1. Verify top and side panels and insulation are


installed.
2. Verify chamber fans are operating.
3. Check J3 heater connector/pins on the PDB.
4. Heater bad. Check heater resistance - should be
36 +/- 5 ohms.
5. Relay failed on PDB, replace PDB.
6. See error code 14-40.
1. Low AC input power. Make sure system is NOT
attached to an ext. cord/power strip
2. Umbilical cable connector loose at head board check to make sure it is fully seated.
3. One of the four heaters is bad. Check resistance
of heaters should read about 92 Ohms
4. T/C board is bad. Replace T/C board
5. Head Board is bad. Replace Head Board
6. If head board with LEDs is present, check
model and support 120VDC LEDs at head
board.
If both model (upper) and support (lower)
LEDs are illuminated, head heater is bad.
Replace head.
If only the model LED (lower) is illuminated,
replace the 120VDC power supply
If only the support LED (upper) is illuminated,
replace the power distribution board
7. If head board with LEDs is not present, use volt
meter to check for 120 VDC at head board.
If 120VDC present at both model and support side, heater is bad. Replace head.
If no 120VDC at support side, replace
120VDC power supply.
If no 120VDC at model side, replace power
distribution board.
8. Check ground between Toggle Plate and Head
Board. If open, check for missing washers on
head.
9. The heater wires in the umbilical cable are
broken.Replace cable.
10. Head T/C is crushed. Check by ohming from
the T/C connector pin to the head body.
Reading should show open. If not, replace
toggle head.
11. Replace toggle head
12. See error codes 14-39, 14-100 and 14-133.

-117

1. Check CFG for multiple EEprom write errors. If


errors are noted:
a. Select Resume. (from display panel)
Note:
b. Unload/Reload carrier
Pausing may be caused by
c. Replace spool
multiple carrier read/write
d. Replace carrier
errors, not temperature issues.
e. Replace material bay
3. Pausing during build and
temperatures are correct.

4. STOPS during build,


display still shows
building, does not start to
build again.

1. Cycle power
2. Reprocess and resend the part
3. If issue continues replace SBC

-118

What happens during Power Up / Boot


Power Switch turned to ON

See M - 3
Chamber lights (dim mode), display backlight
and fans turn on. Material bay drive homes.
Controller
Performs Power On Self Test (POST).
POST looks at voltages, checksum
and memory, etc.
Performs basic hardware setup such
as checks for number of material
bays and loads gantry parameters,
etc.

Once printer software is loaded to


RAM the controller runs the POST
test again.

See M - 5

SBC
BIOS starts and loads the OS
(operating system) from the
hard drive to the SBC RAM.
OS boots - performs check
disk (chkdsk) and loads Linux
OS from hard drive to RAM.
After chkdsk is complete,
Copyright screen will
be displayed.
Loads printer software from
hard drive to RAM. SBC send
second reset (in) command to
controller.
Starting Up
Initializing is
displayed.

Controller receives updated


parameters from SBC.

Loads parameters to controller


(Coldfire chip) (e.g. extrusion
parameters).

Power enabled to the XYZ motors, via


the XP command.

SBC enables power to XYZ


motors

Chamber lights on (full power)


Load globals
Door locks
Performs Calibrate (home) sequence:
1. Moves Z stage down to Z EOT
sensor
2. Moves head to X home (BOT) sensor
3. Moves head to Y home (BOT) sensor
4. Moves head to Y EOT sensor
5. Unlocks door
Reads Carriers

Head and chamber heaters begin to


heat up, via the th, tr and tx
commands

Starting Up
Calibrating is
displayed
Calibrate (home) by issuing
move commands to the
controller

Commands head and chamber


to heat to Idle temperature
(sets temperatures)

Idle is
displayed

-119

M. Power UP / Boot
1. Chamber won't heat up:

2. Head won't heat up.

1. Verify top and side panels and insulation are


installed.
2. Verify chamber fans are operating.
3. Check J3 heater connector/pins on the PDB.
4. Relay failed on PDB, replace PDB.
5. See error code 14-40.
1. Low AC input power. Make sure system is
NOT attached to an ext. cord/power strip
2. Fuse on the 120 VDC supply is blown (on
PDB).
3. Umbilical cable connector loose at head
board - check to make sure it is fully seated.
4. If head board with LEDs is present, check
model and support 120VDC LEDs at head
board.
If both model (upper) and support (lower)
LEDs are illuminated, head heater is bad.
Replace head.
If only the model LED (lower) is illuminated, replace the 120VDC power supply
If only the support LED (upper) is illuminated, replace the power distribution
board
5. If head board with LEDs is not present, use
volt meter to check for 120 VDC at head
board.
If 120VDC present at both model and
support side, heater is bad. Replace
head.
If no 120VDC at support side, replace
120VDC power supply.
If no 120VDC at model side, replace
power distribution board.
6. T/C board is bad. Replace T/C board
7. Head Board is bad. Replace Head Board
8. Check ground between Toggle Plate and
Head Board. If open, check for missing
washers on head.
9. The heater wires in the umbilical cable are
broken
10. Replace toggle head
11. See error code 14-133.

-120

3. No fans, lights, text and no


LCD back light (no nothing)

1. Verify circuit breaker is in the ON position


2. Verify AC power is present at outlet, i.e. plug
a known good item into outlet.
3. Check if the thermal snap switches are open.
If snap switches are open, verify chamber
fans are operating correctly. Replace
chamber fans.
4. Verify chamber fans are operational. If not,
replace 24VDC power supply.
5. Check cable from 24VDC supply to PDB.
6. PDB has failed, no 24 volt output. Replace
PDB.

4. No fans, lights, text and LCD 1. Verify chamber fans are operational. If not,
back light is ON
replace 24VDC power supply.

-121

5. System won't boot, no


display after 5 minutes.
Fans, lights and LCD backlight
are operating
NOTE: Replacement hard drive
may take up to 45 minutes to
boot.

1. If system homes: Check LCD cable, if OK


replace LCD
2. Immediately after power-up, the LCD
backlight should turn on, then the display
pixels should all turn dark briefly before
returning to light (blank) again. If this does
not happen, then the LCD is bad. If it does
happen, then either the LCD, I/O card or
PDB could be at fault.
3. Measure for 12VDC at the hard drive. If not
present check 12VDC power supply, replace
cable or supply as needed.
4. If system does NOT home: Power on for at
least 10 minutes. If still no text, Cycle power
at circuit breaker and wait 10 minutes. If
system does not home, proceed to step 5.
5. Reseat the I/O card.
6. Connect a monitor and keyboard to the SBC.
a. Does BIOS drive listing show HD as
primary, if not reseat IDE ribbon cable
on both ends, Verify red line is to the
right.
b. Disk Boot Failure shown on monitor,
software not seeing the hard drive.
Reseat IDE ribbon cable on both ends.
Verify red line is to the right.
c. Kernel Panic Init Failed shown on
monitor. Replace hard drive.
d. If monitor displays:
/dev/hdaXX: UNEXPECTED INCONSISTENCY;
RUN fsck MANUALLY
*** An error occurred during the file system check
*** Dropping you to a shell; the system will reboot
*** when you leave the shell

- Replace hard drive


e. Disk Check Failed (CHKDSK). Replace
hard drive.
7. Replace I/O Card.
8. Replace SBC.
9. Replace PDB.
6. System powers off after a few 1. Check for shorts in the AC input. (eg. circuit
seconds.
breaker, line filter board, AC input cabling)
2. Power switch is bad, replace power switch.
3. Verify DC power supply outputs are not
shorted to ground.
7. System reaching temp, does
not go to "Idle" screen and
head hits into the right side
of the machine

1. Substrate sensor broken. System is attempting


to retract sensor. Replace the sensor.

-122

8. System displays Copyright


screen and does not home
within 5 minutes.
(Halted on Copyright screen)

1. Cycle Power at the Circuit Breaker.


2. Reseat the IDE cable, Verify red line is to the
right.
3. Reseat the connectors to the I/O Board.
4. Replace controller board.
5. Replace single board computer.
6. Replace hard drive.

9. System displays Initializing


(Halted in Initializing)

1. Cycle Power at the Circuit Breaker.


2. Verify the Substrate Sensor is in the correct
position.
3. Reseat the I/O Board.
4. Reseat the controller/SBC.

10. System displays Starting


Up / Calibrating
(Halted in Starting Up /
Calibrating)

1. Cycle Power at the Circuit Breaker.


2. Verify the Substrate Sensor is in the correct
position.
3. Reseat the I/O Board.

-123

N. "Can't Find Home - Check Modeling Base" displayed on LCD


1. Head stops over Z stage/
modeling base

1. No modeling base
2. Modeling base is used/defective - Replace
3. Verify substrate sensor is working properly,
verify at LED/test points on PDB.
4. Substrate sensor is loose or defective, tighten
or replace.

2. Head moves to lower


modeling base sensor but
does NOT move over
modeling base

1. Modeling base sensor is NOT turning off


before performing touchdown (verify using
LED)
2. Y EOT sensor is not operating correctly. Verify
using LED/test points on PDB.
3. Debris on Z Stage casting prevents Z stage
from finding home

3. Head completes finding


modeling base routine then
displays error message.

1. Modeling base is used/defective - Replace


2. Z offset value is incorrect (out of operating
range) Check/adjust value using HP
Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software.
3. Flatness check may have failed. Use Tera Term
to read the touchdown values. Compare these
values to the "tolerance" value displayed. If
this value is over 1728 replace the modeling
base.
4. If failure reoccurs check XY table level using
the head bracket and dial indicator. Values
should be a band of 0.010 total for the four
points (0.003 total)
- If values are out of spec: Check for loose
tray mounting screws. If so level per
procedure.
- If screws are tight, level the XY table per
procedure.
5. If failure reoccurs the X rear guide rod may be
out of alignment. Replace XY table.

4. Head stops moving while


attempting to lower Z detect
sensor plunger

1. Using PDB LED's check to see that all sensors


are working correctly. If not check sensor
connections/wires or replace sensor
2. Z offset value is incorrect (out of operating
range) Check/adjust value using HP
Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software.

-124

O. Power Down
1. Fails to shutdown.

1. Toggle the power switch again. Wait 5


minutes
2. Shut system off at the breaker.

2. Display indicates "Recovery 1. AC power was interrupted. Verify AC power


after uncontrolled shutdown"
is present at outlet, i.e. plug a known good
item into outlet.
2. Bad power switch cable.
3. UPS malfunctioned, replace UPS.
3. Display indicates "Recovery
after controlled loss of
power"

1. AC power was interrupted. Verify AC power


is present at outlet, i.e. plug a known good
item into outlet.
2. UPS wiring is incorrect. Check wiring
3. UPS malfunctioned, replace UPS.

4. Shuts down immediately


after the power switch is
thrown.

1. Replace the SBC.


2. Replace the PDB.
3. Replace power switch.

5. Shuts down after part is


complete

1. Auto power down was enabled, normal


operation.

P. System VERY slow to reach temperature


1. Envelope takes unusually long 1. Verify all covers and panels are properly
(over 40 minutes) to reach
installed.
temperature.
2. Envelope heater(s) bad. Check heater
resistance - should be about 36 ohms.
3. Replace PDB
4. See error codes 14-14 and 18-01.

Q. Calibration Issues
1. Tip offset cal part - support
and model over .78" offset
2. Tip offset values change but
do not take.

1. Check that tip offset values are close to default


values. default = 0.78, 0.00
1. Tip offset is changed in HP Designjet 3D
Diagnostic Software and the change is
stored correctly in the hard drive (verified by
viewing the CFG file). When the tip_offset
part is run though, the offset does not
change. Replace SBC.

-125

R. Z Calibration Failure
1. First layer too deep into modeling base

1. Add +.010 to Z offset value

Diagnostic details:
Left square (SS)
Upper layers - Missing
1st layer - May be visible, but looks
choked off. Etches may be visible in
modeling base.
Right square (model)
Upper layers - Missing or barely stuck to
modeling base. Part layer shifted.
1st layer - May be visible, but looks
choked off. Etches may be visible in
modeling base.
2. First layer tip too high off modeling base

2. Add -.010 to Z offset value

Diagnostic details:
Left square (SS)
Upper layers - Missing or barely stuck to
modeling base
1st layer - Missing or barely stuck to
modeling base
Right square (model)
Upper layers - Missing or barely stuck to
modeling base
1st layer - Missing or barely stuck to
modeling base

-126

3. Support tip much lower than model tip

1. Add -.010 to Z offset value

Diagnostic details:
Left square (SS)
Upper layers - Built OK
1st layer - OK
Right square (model)
Upper layers - Missing or barely stuck to
modeling base.
1st layer - OK
4. Support tip much higher than model tip

1. Add +.010 to Z offset value

Diagnostic details:
Left square (SS)
Upper layers - Built OK
1st layer - OK
Right square (model)
Upper layers - Did not build completely.
may be some wisps of model material.
1st layer - May be visible, but roughed up
from the support tip
5. Possible worn/bad tip shield

1. Replace tip shield

Diagnostic details:
Left square (SS)
Upper layers - Part built, but surface looks
rough or looks OK but cal failed
1st layer - OK
Right square (model)
Upper layers - Part built, but surface looks
rough or looks OK but cal failed
1st layer - OK

-127

6. Model filament not loaded

1. Load material

Diagnostic details:
Left square (SS)
Upper layers - Built OK
1st layer - OK
Right square (model)
Upper layers - Missing or barely stuck to
modeling base.
1st layer - Missing. No evidence of ABS
extrusion
7. Support filament not loaded

1. Load material

Diagnostic details:
Left square (SS)
Upper layers - Missing. No evidence of
SS extrusion
1st layer - Missing. No evidence of SS
extrusion
Right square (model)
Upper layers - Missing or barely stuck to
modeling base.
1st layer - Missing. No evidence of SS
extrusion
8. Continued difficulty calibrating

1. Replace Z motor
2. Replace XY table. Failed
bearings in the Y drive shaft
possible root cause.

S. Noise
1. Buzzing noise from XY motors

1. Replace XY motors
2. Replace XY table. Failed bearings in the Y
drive shaft possible root cause.

-128

5.0 Connector Pinouts and Signals


Umbilical cable diagram
Umbilical Cable
I/O Card to Head Board and T/C Amp Board
Cable # 205680-0004
I/O card
P505
Pin
P505-17
P505-7

Signal
HD_ALARM_IN
12V

P505-4
P505-3
P505-1
P505-2
P505-5
P505-6
P505-21
P505-10
P505-11
P505-22

HD_SUPPORT_HEATER
120VDC-2
HD_MODEL_HEATER
120VDC-1
GND
GND
MODEL_TOGGLE_IN
SUPPORT_TOGGLE_IN
XEOT_IN
XHOME_IN

Pin
P506-1
P506-7
P506-2
P506-8
P506-3
P506-9
P506-4

Signal
GND
SUBSTRATE_DETECT_IN
SUBSTRATE_CLK_OUT
HD_MTR_PH0_1
HD_MTR_PH1_1
HD_MOTOR_OUT_1
HD_MOTOR_OUT_2

Head board
P301
Pin
P301-14
P301-6
P301-5
P301-17
P301-16
P301-19
P301-20
P301-2
P301-1
P301-11
P301-12
P301-13
P301-22
P301-7
P301-8
P301-21
P301-4

I/O card
P506

T/C board
P3
Pin
P3-8
P3-1
P3-9
P3-6
P3-3

P506-10 CHAMBER_TEMP_ALARM
P506-5
GND
P506-6
SUPP_TC
P506-11
MODEL_TC
P506-12
GND

P3-7
P3-10

Umbilical cable pinouts


Pin

Signal

Signal Information
T/C Open Alarm

P505-17

HD_ALARM_IN

T/C open alarm (open T/C on either


model or support). Normal = 4 V Open
=0V

P505-7

12V

12VDC

Support Heater
P505-4

HD_SUPPORT_HEATER

Return from heater

P505-3

120VDC-2

120 VDC out to support heater

Model Heater
P505-1

HD_MODEL_HEATER

Return from heater

P505-2

120VDC-1

120 VDC out to model heater

P505-5

GND

Signal ground

-129

Pin

Signal

Signal Information

P505-6

GND

Signal ground

Toggle Sensors
P505-21

MODEL_TOGGLE_IN

Toggle in model position. In position = 0


V

P505-10

SUPPORT_TOGGLE_IN

Toggle in support position. In position =


0V

X Axis Sensors
P505-11

XEOT_IN

X EOT sensor. Sensor is NC = 5VDC.


Open = 1.8VDC. See TP18 and DL3 on
PDB

P505-22

XHOME_IN

X BOT sensor. Sensor is NC = 5VDC.


Open = 1.8VDC. See TP19 and DL4 on
PDB

Substrate Detect
P506-7

SUBSTRATE_DETECT_IN

Up position = 5 V. Signal in normally


high (in up position).

P506-2

SUBSTRATE_CLK_OUT

Square wave that drives the opto sensor

Head Motor Encoder


P506-8

HD_MTR_PH0_1

Encoder signal (phase 1 from head


drive motor encoder)

P506-3

HD_MTR_PH1_1

Encoder signal (phase 2 from head


drive motor encoder)

Head Motor Power


P506-9

HD_MOTOR_OUT_1

Power to head drive motor - 12 VDC

P506-4

HD_MOTOR_OUT_2

Power to head drive motor - 12 VDC

Over Temp Alarm


P506-10

CHAMBER_TEMP_ALARM

Chamber/Head area is over temp


(+100C) Chip located on T/C Amp
Board
Normal = 0 V. Over temp alarm = +4 V

T/C Signals
P506-6

SUPPORT_TC

Support T/C signal (0.010 = 1 C).


Signal amplified on T/C Amp Board

P506-11

MODEL_TC

Model T/C signal (0.010 = 1 C). Signal


amplified on T/C Amp Board

P506-12

GND

Signal ground

P506-1

GND

Signal ground

P506-5

GND

Signal ground

-130

Upper harness
Upper Harness
From I/O card to head blower fan, power on/off switch, left
and right chamber lights, LCD display, door solenoid and door switch
Cable # 102597-0002

I/O Card
Pin
P504-8
P504-20

Signal
+12V-3 DOOR LATCH
RTN DOOR LATCH

P504-21
P504-9

24V LAMP #1 RT
RTN LAMP#1 RT

P504-22
P504-10

24V LAMP#2 LF
RTN LAMP#2 LF

P504-7
P504-19

DRSW
GND

P504-6
P504-18

ON/OFF SW
ON/OFF GND

P504-24
24V HEAD COOL FAN
P504-12 SWITCHED RTN HEAD FAN
P504-1
P504-13
P504-2
P504-14
P504-3
P504-4
P504-15

+12V-2
GND
RXD1
TXD1
RTS1
CTS1
CHASSIS GND

P504

Pin
P11-1
P11-3
Chamber light right
P14-1
P14
P14-4
Chamber light left
P16-1
P16
P16-4
Door switch
P10-1
P10
P10-2
On/Off switch
T6-NC
SW
T5-COM
SW
Head cooling fan
P50-1
P50
P50-2
LCD display
P1-10
P1-5
P1
P1-4
P1-9
P1-7
P1-2
P1-6
Door latch
P11

-131

Upper harness pinouts


Pin

Wire
Color

Signal

Signal Information
Door Latch

P504-8

WHITE

+12V-3 DOOR LATCH

Latched = 8 V (does not


receive full 12VDC to reduce
heat). Unlatched = 0 V

P504-20

BLACK

RTN DOOR LATCH

Latched = >1 V. Unlatched =


0V

Chamber Light Right


P504-21

RED

24V LAMP #1 RT

24 VDC to light

P504-9

BLACK

RTN LAMP#1 RT

Light on = 0 V. Light off = 24


V

Chamber Light Left


P504-22

RED

24V LAMP#2 LF

24 VDC to light

P504-10

BLACK

RTN LAMP#2 LF

Light on = 0 V. Light off = 24


V

Door Switch
P504-7

YELLOW

DRSW

Door closed = 0 V. Door


open = 5 V

P504-19

GREEN

GND

GND

On/Off Switch
P504-6

YELLOW

ON/OFF SW

Requesting shutdown to
contoller board. (LED on PDB
is on when powering down)

P504-18

GREEN

ON/OFF GND

GND

Head Cooling Fan


P504-24

RED

24V HEAD COOL FAN

24 VDC

P504-12

BLACK

SWITCHED RTN HEAD


FAN

Blower on = 0 V. Blower off =


24 V

LCD Display
P504-1

W/R

+12V-2

12 VDC

P504-13

GREEN

GND

GND

P504-2

WHITE

RXD1

Receive data

P504-14

YELLOW

TXD1

Transmit data

P504-3

BLUE

RTS1

Request to send

P504-4

ORANG
E

CTS1

Clear to send

P504-15

GRN/Y

CHASSIS GND

GND

-132

Lower harness
Lower Harness
From PDB to Z BOT, Z EOT, chamber fans, frame ID
Cable # 102598-0004

PBD
Pin
P8-11
P8-1
P8-12

Signal
ZHOME_C
ZHOME_E_GND
ZHOME_A

P8-13
P8-3
P8-14

ZEOT_C
ZEOT_E_GND
ZEOT_A

P8-5
P8-15
P8-6
P8-16

+3.3V
I2C CLOCK
GND
I2C DATA

P8-18
P8-8

24V L-R FAN


RTN L-R FAN

P8-20
P8-10

24V R-F FAN


RTN R-F FAN

P8-17
P8-7
P8-19
P8-9

PURGING
GND
DETECTED
+5VDC

Z home (BOT) sensor


P2-4
ZHOME_C
P2-2
ZHOME_E_GND
P2
P2-1
ZHOME_A

P8

Z EOT sensor
P3-4
P3-2
P3
P3-1

ZEOT_C
ZEOT_E_GND
ZEOT_A

Frame ID
P1

P1-1
P1-2
P1-4
P1-3

+3.3V
I2C CLOCK
GND
I2C DATA

Left Chamber Fan


P6-1
24V L-R FAN
P6
P6-2
RTN L-R FAN
Right Chamber Fan
P5-1
24V R-F FAN
P5
P5-2
RTN R-F FAN
NOTE: Purge detect sensor is not used or intalled
Purge Detect
P401-4
PURGING
GND
P401 P401-2
P401-3
DETECTED
P401-1
+5VDC

Lower harness pinouts


Pin

Wire
Color

Signal

Signal Description

Z Home (BOT) Sensor


P8-11

YELLOW

ZHOME_C

Collector (return) to PDB

P8-1

GREEN

ZHOME_E_GND

GND

P8-12

RED

ZHOME_A

Anode (opto driver)

P8-13

YELLOW

ZEOT_C

Collector (return) to PDB

P8-3

GREEN

ZEOT_E_GND

GND

P8-14

RED

ZEOT_A

Anode (opto driver)

Z End of Travel (EOT) Sensor

Frame ID
P8-5

RED

+3.3V

Future enhancement. Frame


ID. E-PROM signal (SN, CAL
file, etc.)

P8-15

YELLOW

I2C CLOCK

Future enhancement. Frame


ID. E-PROM signal (SN, CAL
file, etc.)

-133

Pin

Wire
Color

Signal

Signal Description

P8-6

BLACK

GND

Future enhancement. Frame


ID. E-PROM signal (SN, CAL
file, etc.)

P8-16

GREEN

I2C DATA

Future enhancement. Frame


ID. E-PROM signal (SN, CAL
file, etc.)

Left Chamber Fan


P8-18

RED

24V L-R FAN

24VDC

P8-8

BLACK

RTN L-R FAN

GND

Right Chamber Fan


P8-20

RED

24V R-F FAN

24VDC

P8-10

BLACK

RTN R-F FAN

GND

Purge Detect (not used)


P8-17

BLACK

PURGING

Not used

P8-7

GREEN

GND

Not used

P8-19

WHITE

DETECTED

Not used

P8-9

RED

+5VDC

Not used

-134

Part Quality Troubleshooting


Embedded support strands in model
Characteristics: Strands of support material embedded in model.

Example of embedded support

Problem corrected after re-orientation

Corrective actions:
1.

Change the part orientation. Rotate part 90 degrees - see example


above.

2. Build the part using the Minimal support option.


3. Material is built-up on the shields. Using a brush to remove the excess
material.
4. Replace tip shields.
5. Check brush flicker assembly for damage or wear. If worn or damaged,
replace brush flicker assembly.
6. Tip(s) are loose, check if tip screws are loose. Tighten tip screws.
7.

Replace support material.

-135

Brown streaks (burn marks)


Characteristics: Brown streaks in parts.

Corrective actions:
1.

Part geometrys are such that the model tip sits idle for an extended
period of time. Change the part orientation.

2. Worn tip shrouds, replace tip shrouds.


3. Material build-up behind the tips, remove excess material.
4. Check brush and flicker for damage or wear. Replace brush and flicker
if needed
5. Check and adjust the brush and flicker height.
6. Tip(s) are loose, check if tip screws are loose. Tighten tip screws.

-136

Loss of Extrusion (LOE)


Characteristics: Material strands inside build envelope and/or partially built
parts. Either the model or support material has failed to extrude from swivel
head or toggle plate assembly. Can also be caused by a part falling over or
a part shift.

Here the support material has had a loss of extrusion, causing the model
material to continue to extrude without support material under it. If the
model material has had a loss of extrusion, the scenario would be
reversed, the support material would have extruded with no model
material under it.
Corrective actions:
NOTE: Also reference Troubleshooting Guide for diagnosing and
correcting LOE issues.
1.

Material cartridge is jammed or empty. Replace cartridge.

2. Tips are plugged. Replace the tips


3. Toggle assembly is jammed. Attempt to clear the jam, replace the toggle
head assembly if needed
4. Liquefier heater has higher than normal resistance, value should be
between 175 and 216 ohms. If resistance is too high, replace the toggle
head assembly.
5. Check for twisted or worn filament guide tubes. If worn replace tubes.

-137

6. Filament motor is malfunctioning or is disconnected. Verify proper operation and connections. Test using head maintenance. Also flex the wires
while extruding to test for poor connections.
7.

Broken wire in umbilical cable. Replace umbilical cable.

8. Check umbilical hose for proper alignment and connection to the head
cooling fan.
9. Head cooling fan has low air flow, replace the head cooling fan.
10. Z table could be jammed. Check for debris build up around lead screw
and guide rods. Replace Z stage if needed.
11. Irregular XY table movement, loose guide rods or loose drive belts. Verify the guide rods are securely fastened and the drive belt tensions are
correct. Replace XY table if needed.

-138

Model embedded in to support


Characteristics: Difficult to remove the support material.

Corrective actions:
1.

Run Z and Offset Calibrations

2. Check for loose tip screws. Tighten screws if required.


3. Check for loose modeling base. Use a new modeling base.

-139

Moisture in material
Characteristics: Material will appear to rough or stringy.

Rough

Stringy

Corrective actions:
1.

Material is older than one year. Replace with newer material.

2. Moisture in material. Replace using new material spool.

-140

Open seams
Characteristics: Visible gap in the model material.

Corrective actions:
1.

Check the height of the brush and flicker.

2. Verify wall thickness is greater than: 0.040 for 0.010 slice.


3. Reprocess the part using the latest version of HP Designjet 3D Software
Solution and check STL report for errors.
4. Repair STL file with original CAD program.
5. Possible bad head motor cable. Replace umbilical cable.
6. Possible bad head motor. Replace toggle head assembly.

-141

Part curling
Characteristics: Top surface appears rough. Model and support will
separate or support and substrate will separate.

Corrective actions:
1.

The part is too dense, try using the Sparse Fill option in HP Designjet
Software Solution.

2. Modeling base has been re-used or is defective. Replace with unused


modeling base.
3. Run Z Calibrations.
4. Verify proper operation of all chamber fans. Replace fans as needed.
5. Verify chamber heaters are secured and operating properly. Replace
heaters as needed.
6. Verify X, Y and Z level is within specification. If not level, re-level and
calibrate.

-142

Part fell over


Characteristics: A part falls over and separates at the support base or
substrate. Material will continue to extrude causing strands of material to
build up in the envelope.

Corrective actions:
1.

Substrate has been re-used or is defective. Replace the substrate.

2. Check for material build up on tips, brush and flicker. Remove excess
material.
3. Verify brush/flicker height. Adjust if required.
4. The part does not have sufficient support material. Reprocess the part
using basic or surround support in HP Designjet Software Solution.
5. The base support layer is separating from the substrate. Run Z calibration.
6. Model material is separating from the support base top layer. Run Z calibration.
7.

Z stage may not be moving properly. Check for obstructions.

-143

Part shifting
Characteristics: Model shifts in X or Y axis, this may cause unexpected
contact errors with X or Y sensors.

Corrective actions:
1.

The modeling base is defective or is not latched tightly. Replace


modeling base and latch properly.

2. Check XY table:
A. Verify X and Y guide rods are securely fastened.
B. Verify the toggle head moves freely.
C. Verify proper belt tensions for X and Y axis. Tension the
belts as needed.
D. With X and Y motors unplugged, make sure the motors will
spin freely.

-144

E.

Replace the XY motors or XY table as needed.

3. Check Z stage:
A. Clean the Z stage lead screw.
B. Bad Z stage motor and belt. Replace Z motor and belt as
needed.
C. Verify Z stage is level. Re-level as needed.
D. Verify the Z stage guide rods are not loose. Tighten as
needed.
E.

Z stage may have too much play, replace the Z stage as


needed.

-145

Rough surface quality


Characteristics: Sides of part are rough or over filled, with little or no part
shift.

Corrective actions:
1.

STL wall thickness is too thin. Verify proper wall thickness.

2. Reprocess the part using the latest version of HP Designjet 3D Software


Solution software and check STL report for errors.
3. Check for STL errors in CAD software.
4. Replace the tip shrouds.
5. Loose tips screws, tighten the screws.
6. Replace the tips.
7.

Deformed toggle spring, replace the toggle spring.

8. Check X/Y guide rods for loose hardware. Replace XY table as needed.

-146

Rough quality all over


Characteristics: The part sides, top and bottom are very rough.

Corrective actions:
1.

Moisture in material, replace with new cartridge.

2. Reprocess the part using the latest version of HP Designjet 3D Software


Solution software.
3. Check for STL errors with CAD software.
4. Replace the tip shrouds.
5. Loose tips screws, tighten the screws.
6. Replace the tips.
7.

Deformed toggle spring, replace the toggle spring.

-147

Model strands on parts


Characteristics: Model material strands appear outside the normal model
build.

Corrective actions:
1.

Check for material build up on tips, brush and flicker. Remove excess
material.

2. Verify brush/flicker height. Adjust if required.


3. Run Z and Offset Calibrations.
4. Check X and Y drive belt tensions.
5. Umbilical cable may have bad connection or broken wire, replace the
umbilical cable.
6. Head motor is not stopping when it is supposed to. Replace the toggle
head assembly.
7.

Head motor is not stopping when it is supposed to. Replace the controller board.

-148

Witness marks
Characteristics: Small void on one side of the part,

Corrective actions:
1.

Run Z and Offset calibrations.

2. Replace the tips.


3. Rotate the part 45 degrees in HP Designjet Software Solution.

-149

Wavy surface
Characteristics: One side of the model will have wavy build.

Normal

Wavy

Corrective actions:
1.

Run Z and Offset calibrations.

2. Reprocess the part using the latest version of HP Designjet 3D Software


Solution software and check STL report for errors.
3. Check for STL errors in CAD software.
4. Replace the tip shrouds.
5. Loose tips screws, tighten the screws.
6. Replace the tips.
7.

Deformed toggle spring, replace the toggle spring.

8. Check X/Y guide rods for loose hardware. Replace XY table as needed.

-150

Wavy parts
Characteristics: Parts will shift in X and Y, giving the appearance of waves.

Corrective actions:
1.

Verify X and Y guide rods are securely fastened.

2. Check and adjust X, Y and Z belt tensions.


3. Verify the Z stage is properly leveled.
4. Verify the Z pulley is in the correct position.
5. Replace the Z stage.
6. Replace the XY table.

-151

Under fill
Characteristics: Open seam between start and stop of toolpaths.

Corrective actions:
1.

Verify wall thickness is greater than: 0.040 for 0.010 slice.

2. Reprocess the part using the latest version of HP Designjet 3D Software


Solution software.
3. Check for material build up around head and tips.
4. Replace tips.
5. Replace the head board.

-152

Material sagging on curved parts


Characteristics: Surface finish not smooth.

Corrective actions:
1.

Reprocess the part using the latest version of HP Designjet 3D Software


Solution software.

2. Reprocess part with CAD software.


3. Check for bad bearings in X/Y table. Replace XY table if needed.
4. Check Z stage:
A. Check Z belt tension.
B. Verify Z stage tray is level.
C. Verify the Z stage guide rods are not loose. Tighten as
needed.
D. Check for play on Z lead screw, move up and down.
Replace Z stage if needed.

-153

Fused layers
Characteristics: Layers appear to be fused together.

Corrective actions:
1.

Check Z stage:
A. Check connections to Z motor.
B. If head is digging in to the part, check Z motor belt tension.
C. Check to see if Z stage is jamming.
D. Verify the Z stage is level.
E.

Verify proper operation of the Z jamming flag. May have


become magnetized.

F.

If Z stage is running in to the head, verify correct position of


the travel sensors.

2. Run Z calibration.

-154

Z layers inconsistent
Characteristics: Z layers not bonding properly.

Corrective actions:
1.

Check Z stage:
A. Verify Z motor is tightly secured.
B. Verify Z stage is level.
C. Replace the Z motor.
D. Replace the Z stage if substrate is lower in the back (failed
to find home).

2. Replace the tips.

-155

-156

Removal and
Installation
Maintenance Preparation ........................................................ page 159
Pre-Maintenance Procedures........................................page 160
Exterior Components ...............................................................page 161
Top Panel..................................................................page 161
Side Panels ...............................................................page 162
Display Panel ...........................................................page 165
Front Panel ...............................................................page 166
Door Solenoid ..........................................................page 168
Door Sensor .............................................................page 169
Electronics Bay Components ....................................................page 171
Lower Electronics Bay Cover .......................................page 171
Electronics Bay Cooling Fan .......................................page 177
Controller Board .......................................................page 179
Single Board Computer (SBC) .....................................page 182
Power Distribution I/O Card ......................................page 184
Power Distribution Board (PDB) ....................................page 187
Hard Drive ...............................................................page 191
Line Filter .................................................................page 194
Circuit Breaker ..........................................................page 196
AC Input ..................................................................page 197
Power Switch ............................................................page 199
24VDC Power Supply ................................................page 201
5/12VDC Power Supply ............................................page 205
120VDC Power Supply ..............................................page 208
Head Components ..................................................................page 210
Head Cooling Fan ....................................................page 210
Toggle Head Assembly ..............................................page 212
Substrate Sensor .......................................................page 220
Z Foam Level Assembly...............................................page 223
Toggle Sensor ...........................................................page 225
Toggle Bar ................................................................page 227
Head Board .............................................................page 233

-157

TC Amp board .........................................................page 239


Umbilical Hose .........................................................page 241
Material Tubes ..........................................................page 246
Umbilical Cable ........................................................page 247
XY Table Components ............................................................ page 249
Y Home Sensor .........................................................page 249
Y EOT (End of Travel) Sensor ......................................page 250
X Motor ...................................................................page 252
Y Motor ...................................................................page 260
Y Motor Belt ..............................................................page 263
XY TableY Drive Rod ..................................................page 272
XY Table ...................................................................page 281
Z Stage Components .............................................................. page 304
Z Home Sensor .........................................................page 304
Z EOT (End of Travel) Sensor ......................................page 305
Chamber Fans ..........................................................page 307
Chamber Heaters ......................................................page 310
Thermal Fuses............................................................page 315
Chamber Thermocouple .............................................page 319
Z Motor ...................................................................page 321
Z Stage ...................................................................page 325

-158

Maintenance Preparation
Read these warnings before performing service on printer!
WARNING: Make sure the power is disconnected when
performing any of the disassembly or assembly instructions in this
chapter. Failure to do so can cause severe personal injury or
damage to the electronics.
WARNING: Servicing instructions outlined in this chapter are
intended for use by qualified personnel only. Failure to follow these
guidelines can cause severe injury.
WARNING: The Power Switch does NOT remove power from the
printer. The Breaker Switch located on the rear of the printer MUST
be off before service is performed on the printer. It is recommended
that the AC power cord be disconnected before performing
maintenance outlined in this chapter.
WARNING: Use extreme caution when the door solenoid is
disabled. Axes may move unexpectedly, which may cause serious
injury. Always remember to enable the door solenoid once service
is completed.
Note: All references within this procedure to Left or Right are
made assuming that the printer is being viewed from the Front (the
door and user interface panel side).

-159

Tools needed for repair not order-able as a service part


1.

Standard screwdriver set

2. Phillips screwdriver set


3. Allen wrench set
4. Pliers
5. Channel locks
6. Small wire cutters
7.

Needle nose pliers

8. Assorted wire ties


9. Box wrenches
10. Flashlight
11. Grounding strap
12. Voltmeter
13. Network crossover cable (for communication testing)
14. Laptop computer
15. Nut driver set
16. Dial indicator
17. Serial data cable (for issuing Tera Term commands)

Tools needed for repair that are order-able as a


service part
1.

Belt tension gauge (for adjusting XY table drive belts)

2. Y-Motor belt tensioning tool (for adjusting belt Y table motor belt)
3. Head dial indicator bracket (for XY table and Z stage leveling)
4. Spring Removal Tool
5. Drive Wheel Alignment Rod
6. Set of Shims (Feeler Gauges)
7.

Liquefier Alignment Rod

8. Filament Guide Alignment Rod (For SST Only)


9. Service Guide (CD and Hardcopy)
10. HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software CD
11. HP Designjet 3D Software Solution CD
12. Firmware CD

Pre-Maintenance Procedures
1.

Unload model and support material.

2. Power the printer down using the power switch.


3. After the printer has powered down, turn the main power toggle switch
off on the back of the unit.
4. Remove the AC power cord, RJ-45 network cable and UPS cable (if
used) from the back of the unit.

-160

Exterior Components
Top Panel
Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.

Hardware

10-32 x 12 slotted screws (x3)

Removing the top panel


1.

Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 3 mounting


screws. See Figure 63.
Figure 63: Top panel mounting screw location

Remove the 3 top panel


mounting screws

2. Lift up and slide the top panel towards the back of the printer to remove.
See Figure 64.

-161

Figure 64: Top panel removal

Slide top panel toward the back of


the printer and lift up to remove.

Installing the top panel


1.

Slide the top panel towards the front and in to place, then push down.

2. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 3 mounting


screws.

Side Panels
Required Tools

16 nut driver or standard screwdriver.

Hardware

10-32 x 12 slotted screws (x6)

Removing the side panels


Removing the left side panel:
1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 3 mounting


screws. See Figure 65.

-162

Figure 65: Left side panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 3 left side


panel mounting
screws.

3. Slide panel towards the back of the printer and pull outward to remove.
See Figure 66.
Figure 66: Removing the left side panel

Slide top panel toward the


back of the printer and pull
outward to remove the left side
panel.

-163

Removing the right side panel:


1.

Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 3 mounting


screws. See Figure 67.
Figure 67: Right side panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 3 right side


panel mounting screws.

2. Slide towards the back of the printer and pull outward to remove. See
Figure 68.
Figure 68: Removing the right side panel

Pull the right side panel out and


towards the back of the printer to
remove.

Installing the side panels


1.

Slide the left side panel towards the front of the printer and push into
place.

2. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, Reinstall the 3 mounting


screws.
3. Slide the right side panel towards the front of the printer and push into
place.
4. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, Reinstall the 3 mounting
screws.
5. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-164

Display Panel
Required Tools

Standard screwdriver.

Removing the display panel


1.

Open the chamber door.

2. Gently pry open the display panel access hatch with a standard screwdriver. See Figure 69.
Figure 69: Opening the display panel access hatch

3. Reach behind the display panel and press the tab to release the display
panel. See Figure 70.
Figure 70: Removing the display

4. Disconnect J1 connector. See Figure 71.

-165

Figure 71: Disconnecting the J1 connector

5. Remove the display panel.


Installing the display panel
1.

Connect the J1 Connector.

2. Gently push the display panel into place.


3. Close the display panel access hatch.
4. Close the chamber door.

Front Panel
Required Tools

16 nut driver or standard screwdriver.

Hardware

10-32 x 12 slotted screws (x8)

Removing the front panel


1.

Open the chamber door.

2. Remove the display panel. See Removing the display panel on


page 165
3. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 2 mounting
screws from behind the display panel. See Figure 72.

-166

Figure 72: Front panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 2 mounting screws


from behind the display panel

4. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 6 mounting


screws from the front panel. See Figure 73.
Figure 73: Front panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 6
mounting screws for
the front panel

5. Remove the front panel by pulling outward.

-167

Installing the front panel


1.

Align the front panel with the mounting holes.

2. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 6 mounting


screws.
3. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 2 mounting
screws behind the display panel.
4. Reinstall the display panel. See Installing the display panel on
page 166
5. Close the chamber door.

Door Solenoid
Required Tools

16 nut driver or standard screwdriver.

Removing the door solenoid


1.

Remove the display panel. See Removing the display panel on


page 165

2. Remove the front panel. See Removing the front panel on page 166
3. Disconnect the door solenoid (DRSOL) cable by pressing down on the
tab. See Figure 74.
Figure 74: Door solenoid connector location

Disconnect the DRSOL cable.

4. Push the solenoid pin out and down to remove from the mounting
bracket. See Figure 75.

-168

Figure 75: Removing the door solenoid

Installing the door solenoid


1.

Push the solenoid pin out and slide door solenoid into place on the
mounting plate.

2. Reconnect the DRSOL cable.


3. Reinstall the front panel. See Installing the front panel on page 168
4. Reinstall the display panel. See Installing the display panel on
page 166

Door Sensor
Required Tools

16 nut driver or standard screwdriver.

Removing the door sensor


1.

Remove the display panel. See Removing the display panel on


page 165

2. Remove the front panel. See Removing the front panel on page 166
3. Disconnect the DRSW cable. See Figure 76.
Figure 76: Door sensor cable location

Disconnect the DRSW cable.

4. Gently pull the door sensor out of the mounting plate. See Figure 77.
Figure 77: Removing the Door Sensor

-169

Installing the door sensor


1.

Gently push the door sensor into place on the mounting plate.

2. Connect the door sensor (DRSW) cable.


3. Install the front panel. See Installing the front panel on page 168
4. Install the display panel. See Installing the display panel on page 166

-170

Electronics Bay Components


The main circuit boards and power supplies for the printer are located in the
electronics bay.
Note: When reinstalling components in the Electronics Bay area
note that cable J401 is unused. (Not connected)

Lower Electronics Bay Cover


Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.

Hardware

10-32 x 38 slotted screws (x3)

Opening the electronics bay


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Remove the filament tubes from the Y connectors by pushing down on
the ring and pulling back on the filament tubes. See Figure 78.
Figure 78: Removing the filament tubes from the Y connectors

4. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 3 mounting


screws on the top of the electronics bay cover. See Figure 79.

-171

Figure 79: Electronics bay cover mounting screw locations

Remove the 3 mounting


screws

5. Gently pull the electronics bay cover down. See Figure 80.
Figure 80: Electronics bay with cover lowered

Closing the electronics bay


1.

Gently push the electronics bay cover back in to the closed position.

2. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 3 mounting


screws.
3. Reconnect the filament tubes to the Y connectors.
4. Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
5. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-172

Upper Electronics Bay Cover


Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.

Hardware

10-32x38 slotted screws (x4)

Removing the upper electronics bay cover


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, loosen but do not
remove the top left and right mounting screws. See Figure 81.
Figure 81: Upper electronics bay cover top mounting screw locations

Loosen but do not


remove the 2
mounting screws

4. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the bottom left
and right mounting screws. See Figure 82.

-173

Figure 82: Upper electronics bay cover bottom mounting screw locations

Remove the bottom left and


right mounting screws

5. Lift the cover up and off of the top mounting screws.


Installing the upper electronics bay cover
1.

Slide the cover down on to the top left and right side mounting screws.

2. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the bottom left
and right side mounting screws.
3. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, tighten the top left and
right side mounting screws.
4. Install the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
5. Install the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-174

Removing the Electronics Bay


Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.

Hardware

10-32 x 12 slotted screws (x8)

Removing the electronics bay


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Remove the upper electronics bay cover. See Removing the upper electronics bay cover on page 173
4. Touch the metal plate of the electronics bay cover to discharge any static
electricity.
5. Disconnect the 6 I/O card cables by pressing down on the long tabs
and pulling out. See Figure 83.
6. Disconnect the chamber thermocouple wire. See Figure 83.
Figure 83: I/O card cable locations

I/O Card cable


locations

7.

Chamber thermocouple
wire location

Remove the left and right side electronics bay mounting screws with a
5 nut driver or standard screwdriver. See Figure 84.
16

-175

Figure 84: Electronics Bay mounting screw locations

Remove the 4 left side


mounting screws

Remove the 4 right side


mounting screws

8. Slide the electronics bay out 3 inches (76mm) and disconnect the cables
from the rear of the power distribution board. See Figure 85.
Figure 85: Power distribution board rear cable locations

PDB rear cable locations

9. To remove, slide the entire electronics bay out from the back of the
printer.
Installing the electronics bay
1.

Slide the electronics bay into position, leaving 3 inches (76mm).

2. Connect the 4 rear power distribution board cables.


3. Slide the electronics bay back into position
4. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 4 left and 4
right side mounting screws.
5. Connect the I/O card cables.
6. Reinstall the upper electronics bay cover. See Installing the upper electronics bay cover on page 174
7.

Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164

8. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-176

Electronics Bay Cooling Fan


Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.

64

allen wrench.

Hardware

6-32 x 1 flat head cap screws (x4)

Removing the electronics bay cooling fan


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Open the Electronics Bay. See Opening the electronics bay on
page 171
4. Touch the metal plate of the electronics bay cover to discharge any static
electricity.
5. Disconnect the P1 cable from the fan. See Figure 86.
Figure 86: Electronics bay cooling fan connector location

P1 Connector

6. Using a 564 allen wrench, remove the 4 mounting screws. See Figure
87.

-177

Figure 87: Electronics bay cooling fan mounting screw locations

Remove the 4 mounting


screws

7.

Remove the cooling fan.

Installing the electronics bay cooling fan


1.

Align the cooling fan with the 4 mounting holes.

2. Using a 564 allen wrench, reinstall the 4 mounting screws.


3. Reconnect the P1 cable.
4. Close the electronics bay. See Closing the electronics bay on
page 172
5. Install the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
6. Install the top panel. See on page 162

-178

Controller Board
Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.


Phillips screwdriver

Hardware

6-32 x 14 Phillips pan head screws (x6)

Removing the controller board


1.

Open the electronics bay. See Opening the electronics bay on


page 171

2. Touch the metal plate of the electronics bay cover to discharge any static
electricity.
3. Remove the 3 ribbon cables by pressing the tabs outward and gently
pulling the ribbon cables out of the sockets. See Figure 88.
Figure 88: Controller board ribbon cable locations

Remove the 3 ribbon


cables

4. Using a standard screwdriver, loosen the 2 screws that hold the diagnostics DB-9 cable in place. Then gently pull the cable out of the connector.
See Figure 89.

-179

Figure 89: Remove the 2 screws that hold the Diagnostics DB-9 cable in
place

Remove the DB-9


connector

5. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the 6 controller board mounting


screws. See Figure 90.
Figure 90: Controller board mounting screw locations

Remove the (6)


mounting screws

6. Gently lift the controller board up from the single board computer (SBC)
at the P104 connector. DO NOT bend any pins on the board.
See Figure 91.

-180

Figure 91: P104 connector location

P104 Connector

Installing the controller board


1.

Align the pins of the controller board with the P104 connector of the
SBC and gently press down in to position.

2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, reinstall the 6 mounting screws.


3. Reconnect the diagnostics DB-9 connector to the controller board.
4. Using a standard screwdriver, tighten the 2 mounting screws.
5. Reconnect the 3 ribbon cables to the PDB.
6. Close the Electronics Bay. See Closing the electronics bay on
page 172
7.

From the workstation, open the HP Designjet 3D Software Solution.

8. Connect to the printer.


9. Insert the printer firmware CD into the workstation CD drive.
10. From the Printer Services tab, click on the Update Software button.
11. Navigate HP Designjet 3D Software Solution to the Upgrade (.UPG) file
on the printer firmware CD.
12. The printer will load, reboot and verify the upgrade.

-181

Single Board Computer (SBC)


Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.


Phillips screwdriver

Hardware

6-32 x 14 Phillips pan head screws (x4)

Removing the single board computer


1.

Open the electronics bay. See Opening the electronics bay on


page 171

2. Touch the metal plate of the electronics bay cover to discharge any static
electricity.
3. Remove the controller board. See Removing the controller board on
page 179
4. Disconnect the J2 power connector. See Figure 92.
5. Disconnect the SATA cable by pressing the tab in and pulling outwards.
See Figure 92.
Figure 92: J2 power and SATA connector locations

Disconnect SATA
connector
Disconnect the J2
connector

-182

6. Disconnect the RJ-45 network cable. See Figure 93.


Figure 93: RJ-45 network cable location
Disconnect the
RJ45 connector

7.

Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the 4 mounting screws. See Figure


94.
Figure 94: SBC mounting screw locations

Remove the 4
mounting screws

8. Using a standard screwdriver, loosen the display cable mounting screws.


See Figure 95.
9. Disconnect the display cable from the SBC. See Figure 95.

-183

Figure 95: SBC display cable location


Disconnect the
Display cable

Reinstalling the single board computer


1.

Reconnect the display cable.

2. Using a standard screwdriver, tighten the display cable mounting


screws.
3. Align the SBC with the mounting holes.
4. Using a Phillips screwdriver, reinstall the 4 mounting screws.
5. Reconnect the RJ-45 network cable.
6. Reconnect the SATA cable.
7.

Reconnect the J2 power cable.

8. Reinstall the controller board. See Installing the controller board on


page 181
9. Close the electronics bay. See Closing the electronics bay on
page 172

Power Distribution I/O Card


Required Tools

16 nut driver or standard screwdriver.


Phillips screwdriver

Hardware

-184

6-32 x 14 Phillips pan head screws (x3)

Removing the I/O card


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Open the electronics bay. See Opening the electronics bay on
page 171
4. Touch the metal plate of the electronics bay cover to discharge any static
electricity.
5. Disconnect the 6 cables from the I/O card by pushing in on the locking
tabs and pulling outward. See Figure 96.
Figure 96: I/O card cable locations

Disconnect all 6
of the cables

6. Disconnect the thermocouple from the back side of the I/O card by pulling outward. See Figure 97.
Figure 97: Chamber thermocouple wire location

Disconnect the
chamber
thermocouple

7.

Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the 3 mounting screws from the I/O
card. See Figure 98.

-185

Figure 98: I/O card mounting screw locations

Remove the 3
mounting screws

8. Gently pull the I/O card out from the power distribution board sockets.
Installing the I/O card
1.

Gently slide the I/O card in to the power distribution board sockets.

2. Verify the I/O card is seated properly by viewing the connection


through the viewing slots. See Figure 99.
Figure 99: I/O card viewing slot location

I/O card
connections

3. Using a Phillips screwdriver, reinstall the 3 mounting screws.


4. Reconnect the thermocouple to the back side of the I/O card.
5. Reconnect the 6 cables to the I/O card.
6. Close the electronics bay. See Closing the electronics bay on
page 172
7.

Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164

8. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-186

Power Distribution Board (PDB)


Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.


Phillips screwdriver

Hardware

6-32 x 14 Phillips pan head screws (x12)

10-32 x 12 slotted screws (x8)

Removing the power distribution board


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Open the electronics bay. See Opening the electronics bay on
page 171
4. Touch the metal plate of the electronics bay cover to discharge any static
electricity.
5. Remove the I/O card. See Removing the I/O card on page 185
6. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 4 screws on
the left and right side of the electronics bay and carefully slide the electronics bay out of the printer about 3 inches (76mm). See Figure 100.

-187

Figure 100: Electronics bay mounting screw locations

Remove the 4 right side


mounting screws

7.

Remove the 4 left side


mounting screws

Disconnect the 4 cables from the back side of the power distribution
board. See Figure 101.
Figure 101: Power distribution board rear cable locations

Disconnect the 4 cables on the back of the PDB

8. Slide the Electronics Bay back into place.


9. Disconnect the 10 cables from the front of the PDB. See Figure 102.

-188

Figure 102: Power distribution board front cable locations

Disconnect
the 4 cables

Disconnect
the 3 ribbon
cables

Disconnect
the 3 ribbon
cables

10. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the 12 mounting screws. See Figure
103.
Figure 103: Power distribution board mounting screw locations

11. To remove, gently pull the power distribution board outward.

-189

Installing the power distribution board


1.

Align the power distribution board with the mounting holes.

2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, reinstall the 12 mounting screws.


3. Reconnect the 10 cables to the front of the power distribution board.
4. Carefully slide the electronics bay out 3 inches (76mm) and reconnect
the 4 cables to the back of the PDB.
5. Carefully slide the electronics bay back into position.
6. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 8 mounting
screws on the left and right sides.
7.

Reinstall the I/O card. See Installing the I/O card on page 186

8. Close the electronics bay. See Closing the electronics bay on


page 172
9. Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
10. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-190

Hard Drive
Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.


Phillips screwdriver

Hardware

6-32 x 14 Phillips pan head screws (x8)

Removing the hard drive


1.

Open the electronics bay. See Opening the electronics bay on


page 171

2. Touch the metal plate of the electronics bay cover to discharge any static
electricity.
3. Disconnect the power input cable by pressing the metal tab in and pulling down. See Figure 104.
Figure 104: Hard drive power cable location

Disconnect the power


input cable

4. Disconnect the SATA cable by pressing the metal tab in and pulling
down. See Figure 105.

-191

Figure 105: SATA cable location

Disconnect the SATA


cable

5. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the 4 mounting screws. See Figure


106.
Figure 106: Hard drive mounting screw locations

Remove the
mounting screws

Remove the
mounting screws

6. Slide the hard drive up and out of the electronics bay.


7.

-192

Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the mounting brackets from the hard
drive. See Figure 107.

Figure 107: Hard drive mounting bracket screw locations

Remove mounting
brackets

Installing the hard drive


1.

Using a Phillips screwdriver, reinstall the 2 mounting brackets.

2. Push the hard drive in the slots and down into position.
3. Using a Phillips screwdriver, reinstall the 4 mounting screws.
4. Reconnect the SATA cable.
5. Reconnect the power input cable.
6. Close the electronics bay. See Closing the electronics bay on
page 172
7.

Power up the printer. The printer may take up to 45 minutes to run the
Check Disc command before you see anything on the display panel.

8. After the printer has rebooted and is idle, press Maintenance > System >
Set Network.
9. Select either Dynamic networking or Static networking.
10. If using Static networking, enter the printers IP Address, Default Gateway
and Subnet Mask values.
11. From the PC, open the HP Designjet 3D Software Solution.
12. Connect to the printer.
13. Insert the printer firmware CD into the workstation CD drive.
14. From the Printer Services tab, click on the Update Software button.
15. Navigate HP Designjet 3D Software Solution to the Upgrade (.UPG) file
on the printer firmware CD.
16. The printer will load, reboot and verify the upgrade.

-193

Line Filter
Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.


Phillips screwdriver

Hardware

6-32 x 14 Phillips pan head screws (x3)

Removing the line filter


1.

Open the electronics bay. See Opening the electronics bay on


page 171

2. Touch the metal plate of the electronics bay cover to discharge any static
electricity.
3. Remove L1-1 and N1-1 spade connectors from the right side of the board
by pulling back on the connector. See Figure 108.
Figure 108: L1-1 and N1-1 spade connector locations

Disconnect the N1-1


spade connector

Disconnect the L1-1


spade connector

4. Remove L2-1 and N2-1 Spade connectors from the left side of the board
by pulling up on the connector. See Figure 109.

-194

Figure 109: L2-1 and N2-1 Spade connector locations

Disconnect the N2-1


spade connector

Disconnect the L2-1


spade connector

5. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the 3 mounting screws. See Figure


110.
Figure 110: Line filter mounting screw locations

Remove the 3 mounting screws

6. Lift board and gently remove the line filter.


Installing the line filter
1.

Align the line filter with the mounting holes.

2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, reinstall the 3 mounting screws.


3. Reconnect the L2-1 and N2-1 spade connectors to the left side of the
board.
4. Reconnect the LF2-P and LF2-N spade connectors to the right side of the
board.
5. Close the electronics bay. See Closing the electronics bay on
page 172

-195

Circuit Breaker
Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.


Phillips screwdriver

Removing the circuit breaker


1.

Open the electronics bay. See Opening the electronics bay on


page 171

2. Touch the metal plate of the electronics bay cover to discharge any static
electricity.
3. Remove the Load and CB1 spade connectors from the circuit breaker by
pulling up on the connectors. See Figure 111.
Figure 111: Load and CB1 spade connector locations

Load

CB1

4. Remove the CB1 Line and CB2 spade connectors from the circuit
breaker by pulling up on the connectors. See Figure 112.
Figure 112: CB1 Line and CB2 spade connector locations

CB1 Line

-196

CB2

5. Squeeze the tabs on the circuit breaker and push through the electronics
bay panel. See Figure 113.
Figure 113: Removing the circuit breaker

Press tabs and push the


circuit breaker through
the panel

Installing the circuit breaker


1.

Push the circuit breaker through the electronics bay panel until it locks in
place.

2. Reconnect the CB1 and CB2 spade connectors to the circuit breaker.
3. Reconnect the Load and CB1 spade connectors to the circuit breaker.
4. Close the electronics bay. See Closing the electronics bay on
page 172

AC Input
Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.


Phillips screwdriver

Hardware

2 x 6mm Phillips pan head screws (x2)

-197

Removing the AC Input


1.

Open the electronics bay. See Opening the electronics bay on


page 171

2. Touch the metal plate of the electronics bay cover to discharge any static
electricity.
3. Remove the LF-G (green) spade connector. See Figure 114.
4. Remove the LF-N (white) spade connector. See Figure 114.
5. Remove the LF-P (black) spade connector. See Figure 114.
Figure 114: AC input connection locations

LF-N (white)

LF-G (green)

LF-P (black)

6. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the 2 mounting screws and remove


the AC Input. See Figure 115.
Figure 115: AC input mounting screw locations

Remove the mounting screws

Installing the AC Input.


1.

Install the 2 AC Input mounting screws with a Phillips screwdriver.

2. Connect the LF-P (black) spade connector.


3. Connect the LF-N (white) spade connector.
4. Connect the LF-G (green) spade connector.
5. Close the electronics bay. See Closing the electronics bay on
page 172

-198

Power Switch
Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.

Hardware

10-32 x 38 slotted screws (x2)

Removing the Power Switch


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the left side panel. See Removing the side panels on
page 162
3. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 2 power
switch housing mounting screws. See Figure 116.
Figure 116: Power switch housing mounting screw locations

Remove the 2
mounting screws

4. Remove the white SW2 wire from the spade connector labeled 3. See
Figure 117.
5. Remove the black SW3 wire from the spade connector labeled 1a.
See Figure 117.
6. Remove the yellow NC wire from the spade connector labeled 2a.
See Figure 117.
7.

Remove the green COM wire from the spade connector labeled 2.
See Figure 117.

-199

Figure 117: Power switch connector locations

8. Press the Power Switch tabs in and push it out of the housing. See Figure
118.
Figure 118: Removing the power switch

Press tabs to
release

Press tabs to
release

Installing the power switch


1.

Push the power switch into place on the power switch housing.

2. Connect the yellow NC wire to the spade connector labeled 2a.


3. Connect the green COM wire to the spade connector labeled 2.
4. Connect the black SW3 wire to the spade connector labeled 1a.
5. Connect the white SW2 wire to the spade connector labeled 3.
6. Align the power switch housing with the mounting holes.
7.

Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 2 mounting


screws.

8. Reinstall the left side panel. See Installing the side panels on
page 164
9. Install the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-200

24VDC Power Supply


Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.


Phillips screwdriver

Hardware

10-32 x 38 slotted screws (x3)

6-32 x 14 Phillips pan head screws (x2)

Removing the 24VDC Power Supply


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Remove the electronics bay. See Removing the electronics bay on
page 175
4. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 3 rear electronics bay mounting screws. See Figure 119.
Figure 119: Rear electronics bay mounting screw locations

Remove the 3
mounting screws

5. Open the rear panel of the electronics bay.


6. Touch the metal plate of the electronics bay cover to discharge any static
electricity.

-201

7.

Disconnect the J1 connector on the 24VDC power supply. See Figure


120.
Figure 120: J1 cable location

Disconnect J1

8. Disconnect J3 1 through 4 connectors using a Phillips screwdriver. Note


the position of the wires for reinstallation. See Figure 121.
Figure 121: J3 1 through 4 connector locations

Disconnect J3 1
through 4

9. Close the rear panel of the electronics bay and remove the 2 board
mounting screws using a Phillips screwdriver. See Figure 122.

-202

Figure 122: Closing the rear panel of the electronics bay

Remove the 2
mounting screws

10. Open the rear panel of the electronics bay and remove the 2 board
mounting screws from the top of the panel using a Phillips screwdriver.
See Figure 123.
Figure 123: Removing the 2 mounting screws from the top of the panel

Remove the 2
mounting screws

11. Remove the 24VDC power supply.

-203

Installing the 24VDC power supply


1.

Align the 24VDC power supply with the top of the rear panel of the
electronics bay and the tab to the right of the mounting location. See
Figure 124.
Figure 124: Align the 24VDC power supply

2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, reinstall the 2 mounting screws to the top of


the rear panel.
3. Close the rear electronics bay panel.
4. Using a Phillips screwdriver, reinstall the 2 mounting screws.
5. Reconnect J3 1 through 4 connectors using a Phillips screwdriver.
6. Reconnect J1 on the 24VDC power supply.
7.

Close the rear panel of the Electronics Bay.

8. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 3 mounting


screws.
9. Reinstall the electronics bay. See Installing the electronics bay on
page 176
10. Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
11. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-204

5/12VDC Power Supply


Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.


Phillips screwdriver

Hardware

10-32 x 38 slotted screws (x3)

6-32 x 14 Phillips pan head screws (x3)

Removing the 5/12VDC power supply


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Remove the electronics bay. See Removing the electronics bay on
page 175
4. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 3 rear electronics bay mounting screws. See Figure 125.
Figure 125: Rear electronics bay mounting screw locations

Remove the 3
mounting screws

5. Open the rear panel of the electronics bay.


6. Touch the metal plate of the electronics bay cover to discharge any static
electricity.
7.

Disconnect the J2 spade connector by lifting up on the connector. See


Figure 126.

-205

Figure 126: J2 spade connector location

8. Disconnect the SK2 connector by pressing the tab and lifting up on the
connector. See Figure 127.
Figure 127: SK2 connector location

9. Disconnect the power input cable by pressing the tab and lifting up on
the connector. See Figure 128.
Figure 128: Power input cable location

-206

10. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the 3 mounting screws. See Figure
129.
Figure 129: 5/12 VDC supply mounting screw locations

11. Remove the 5/12VDC power supply.


Installing the 5/12VDC power supply
1.

Align the 5/12VDC power supply and press down into place.

2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, reinstall the 3 mounting screws.


3. Reconnect the SK2 connector.
4. Reconnect the J2 spade connector.
5. Close the rear panel of the electronics bay.
6. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 3 rear electronics bay mounting screws.
7.

Reinstall the electronics bay. See Installing the electronics bay on


page 176

8. Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
9. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-207

120VDC Power Supply


Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.


Phillips screwdriver

Hardware

10-32 x 38 slotted screws (x3)

6-32 x 14 Phillips pan head screws (x3)

Removing the 120VDC power supply


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Remove the electronics bay. See Removing the electronics bay on
page 175
4. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 3 rear electronics bay mounting screws. See Figure 130.
Figure 130: Rear electronics bay mounting screw locations

Remove the 3
mounting screws

5. Open the rear panel of the electronics bay.


6. Touch the metal plate of the electronics bay cover to discharge any static
electricity.
7.

-208

Disconnect the J601 connector by pressing the tab and pulling the connector up. See Figure 131.

Figure 131: J601 connector location


Disconnect
J601

8. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the 3 mounting screws. See Figure


132.
Figure 132: 120 VDC mounting screw locations

9. Remove the 120VDC power supply.


Installing the 120 VDC power supply
1.

Align the 120VDC power supply with the mounting holes.

2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, reinstall the 3 mounting screws.


3. Reconnect J601.
4. Close the rear panel of the electronics bay.
5. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 3 rear electronics bay mounting screws.
6. Reinstall the electronics bay. See Installing the electronics bay on
page 176
7.

Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164

8. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-209

Head Components
Head Cooling Fan
Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.

64

allen wrench.

Hardware

6-32 x 134 flat head cap screws (x2)

Removing the head cooling fan


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Remove the upper electronics bay cover. See Removing the upper electronics bay cover on page 173
4. Disconnect the J258 cable by pressing the tab and pulling the connector
apart. See Figure 133.
Figure 133: J258 cable location

Disconnect J258

5. Using a 764 allen wrench, remove the 2 mounting screws. See Figure
134.

-210

Figure 134: Head cooling fan mounting screw locations

Remove the 2
mounting screws

6. Remove the head cooling fan.


Installing the Head Cooling fan
1.

Align the head cooling fan with the 2 mounting holes.

2. Using a 764 allen wrench, reinstall the 2 mounting screws.


3. Reconnect the J258 cable.
4. Install the upper electronics bay cover. See Installing the upper electronics bay cover on page 174
5. Install the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
6. Install the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-211

Toggle Head Assembly


Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.


Cutters

Hardware

Wire tie (x1)


10-32 x 38 slotted screws (x7)

10-32 x 12 slotted screws (x4)

Removing the toggle head assembly


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the right side
access panel mounting screws and remove the panel. See Figure 135.
Figure 135: Right side access panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 7
mounting screws.

4. Remove the head cover by pressing the tabs in and pulling the cover outward. See Figure 136.

-212

Figure 136: Head cover tab locations

Press tab in to
release head
cover

Press tab in to
release head
cover

5. Remove the air plenum by pressing in the upper and lower tabs and
pulling outward. See Figure 137.
Figure 137: Air plenum tab locations

Press in tab to
release air
plenum

Press in tab to
release air
plenum

Press in tab to
release air
plenum

Press in tab to
release air
plenum

6. Disconnect the material tubes by pressing down on the retaining ring


and lifting up the material tubes. See Figure 138.

-213

Figure 138: Material tubes and retaining rings

Press down on
the retaining
rings

Lift the material


tubes out of
the rings

7.

Disconnect the thermocouples from the TC Amp board and remove the
wires from the wire retainer. See Figure 139. and Figure 140.
Figure 139: Thermocouple locations

Disconnect the 2
thermocouples from
the TC Amp board

Figure 140: Thermocouple wire retainer location

Remove the
thermocouple wires
from the retainer

8. Disconnect the model and support heater cables by pressing the tabs in
and pulling the cables outward. See Figure 141.

-214

Figure 141: Heater power cable locations

Disconnect the
model side
heater cable

Disconnect
the support
side heater
cable

9. Disconnect the toggle sensor cable from the toggle sensor.


Figure 142: Toggle sensor location

Disconnect the toggle


sensor cable

10. Disconnect the toggle sensor cable from the head board.
Figure 143: Toggle sensor cable location

Disconnect the
toggle sensor
cable from the
head board

11. Cut the wire tie holding the drive motor cables in place.

-215

Figure 144: Wire tie location

Cut and remove the


wire tie from the head
motor

12. Disconnect the 3 cables from the rear of the head board by pressing the
tabs in and pulling outward. See Figure 145.
Figure 145: Rear head board cable locations

Disconnect the 3
cables

13. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 4 toggle
head mounting screws. Toggle the head to the left to remove the bottom
right screw and toggle the head to the right to remove the bottom left
screw.

-216

Figure 146: Toggle head mounting screw locations

Remove the
toggle head
mounting
screws

Remove the
toggle head
mounting
screws

14. Slide the toggle head assembly out of the translator.


Installing the toggle head assembly
1.

Remove the tag from the new toggle head assembly and set aside for
later use.

2. Align the 2 mounting posts with the 2 mounting holes and gently push
the toggle head into position.
3. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 4 mounting
screws.
4. Reconnect the 3 head motor cables to the back of the head board.
5. Replace the wire tie holding the head motor cables in place. See Figure
147.
Figure 147: Wire tie location

Reinstall wire tie around


the head motor

6. Reconnect the toggle sensor cable to the head board.


7.

Gently reconnect the toggle sensor cable to the toggle sensor.

8. Reconnect the model and support heater cables to the head board.
9. Reconnect the model and support thermocouples to the TC Amp board.
10. Place the model and support thermocouple wires in the wire retaining
clip.
11. Connect the model and support material tubes.

-217

12. Install tips into the heater blocks.


13. Install tip shields onto the tips.
14. Reinstall the air plenum.
15. Reinstall the head cover.
16. Reinstall the right side access cover.
17. Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
18. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162
19. Power the printer up.
20. Enter tip offset value (On tag attached to replacement toggle head):
A. For printer firmware version 9.1 or newer:
i. While the printer is at Idle, enter standby mode by pressing the
Standby... button.
ii. Enter the Service Calibration menu by pressing the following
button sequence on the display panel: 3,2,3,3,1. See Figure 148.
Figure 148: Service Calibration button sequence

Button 0
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3

iii. Press the Edit Configuration button.


iv. Press the Next... button.
v. Press the Next... button.
vi. Press the ZT2T (Z tip to tip) button.
vii.Enter the calibration value from the tag that came with the
replacement toggle head assembly by pressing the Increment,
Decrement and Next Digit buttons.
NOTE: The value for ZT2T must be between -0.0500 and
0.0500.

-218

viii.When finished, press Done...


ix. Press the Next... button until you reach the last page.
x. Press the Done... button.
xi. Press the Save and reboot button.
B. For printer firmware version 9.0 or older:
i. The printer will reboot and return to idle. Load the HP Designjet
3D Diagnostics Software.
ii. Click on the + button to add the printer.
iii. Enter the printer name, printer type, printer location and printer IP
address.
iv. Click on the green check mark button.
v. Connect to the printer in HP Designjet 3D Diagnostics Software
by selecting it out of the Current Modeler drop down menu.
vi. Click on the Tip Offset button.
vii.Enter the value from Z Tip to Tip field on the tag that came with
the toggle head assembly into the Z Tip to Tip field in the Tip
Offset window.
viii.Click on the green check mark button.
ix. Cycle power to the printer.
x. From the display panel press Maintenance > Machine > Tips
xi. Perform Z calibration.
xii.Perform XY Offset calibration.

-219

Substrate Sensor
Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.

32

allen wrench.

Hardware

Wire tie (x1)


10-32 x 38 slotted screws (x7)

4-40 x 14 slotted screws and # 4 split lock washer (x4)

Removing the substrate sensor


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Using a 516 nut driver, remove the 7 right side access panel mounting
screws. See Figure 149.
Figure 149: Right side access panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 7
mounting screws.

4. Disconnect the substrate sensor wire from the head board by pressing in
on the tab and pulling outward. See Figure 150.

-220

Figure 150: Substrate sensor connector location

Disconnect the
substrate sensor

5. Using a cutters, cut and remove the wire tie around the head motor. See
Figure 151.
Figure 151: Wire tie location

Cut and remove the


wire tie from the head
motor

6. Using a 332 allen wrench, remove the 4 substrate sensor mounting


screws. See Figure 152.
Figure 152: Substrate sensor mounting screw locations

Remove the 4
mounting screws

7.

Remove the substrate sensor.

-221

Installing the substrate sensor


1.

Align the substrate sensor with the mounting holes.

2. Using a 332 allen wrench, reinstall the 4 substrate sensor mounting


screws.
3. Reconnect the substrate sensor wire to the head board.
4. Reinstall the wire tie around the head motor and wires. See Figure 153.
Figure 153: Wire tie location

Reinstall the wire tie


around the head motor

5. Align the right side access panel with the mounting holes.
6. Using a 516 nut driver, reinstall the right side access panel mounting
screws.
7.

Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164

8. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-222

Z Foam Level Assembly


Required Tools

32

allen wrench

Hardware

4-40 x 14 slotted screws and # 4 split lock washer (x4)

Removing the Z Foam Level Assembly:


1.

Power down the system using the power-down switch. Once the system is
powered down, switch the circuit breaker to the off position.

2. Unplug the AC power cord, RJ-45 network cable and UPS cable (if
used) from the rear of the printer.
3. Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161
4. Remove the side panels. See Side Panels on page 162
5. Remove the Substrate sensor. See Removing the substrate sensor on
page 220
6. Push the Z foam level assembly actuator up into the assembly and slide
the Z foam level bar to the right until it is clear of the assembly. See (Figure 154)
Figure 154: Removing the Z foam level bar

7.

Using a 332 allen wrench, remove the 4 Z foam level assembly mounting screws and washers. See (Figure 155)
Note: Be careful not to lose the washers.

-223

Figure 155: Z foam level assembly mounting screw locations

4 mounting screws

8. Remove the Z foam level assembly and discard.


Installing the Z Foam Level Assembly:
1.

Remove the Z foam level bar from the assembly by pushing the actuator
into the housing and pulling the bar to the right.

2. Align the housing with the mounting holes and use a 332 allen wrench
to reinstall the 4 mounting screws and washers.
3. Insert the actuator and spring into the housing and push all the way up.
4. Slide the bar to the left and into the housing, when installed correctly the
actuator will not come out of the housing.
5. Reinstall the Substrate sensor. See Installing the substrate sensor on
page 222
6. Reinstall the side panels. See Side Panels on page 162
7.

Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

8. Reconnect the AC power cord, RJ-45 network cable and UPS cable (if
used).
9. Power on the system. The system should reach Idle with no displayed
errors.
10. Run a small test part and monitor system operation during build.

-224

Toggle Sensor
Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.

32

allen wrench.

Hardware

4-40 x14 slotted screws (x2)

Removing the toggle sensor


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Remove the right side access panel. See Figure 156.
Figure 156: Right side access panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 7
mounting screws.

4. Gently disconnect the toggle sensor wire by pulling outwards. See Figure 157.

-225

Figure 157: Toggle sensor wire connector location

Gently disconnect the


toggle sensor cable

5. Using a standard screwdriver, remove the 2 toggle sensor mounting


screws. See Figure 158.
Figure 158: Toggle sensor mounting screw locations

Remove the 2
mounting screws

6. Remove the toggle sensor.


Installing the toggle sensor
1.

Align the toggle sensor with the mounting holes.

2. Using a standard screwdriver, reinstall the 2 mounting screws.


3. Reconnect the toggle sensor wire to the toggle sensor.
4. Align the right side access panel with the mounting holes.
5. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the right side
access panel mounting screws.
6. Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
7.

-226

Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

Toggle Bar
Required tools:

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver

64

allen wrench

Hardware

6-32 x 14 slotted screws (x2)

.380 ID Closed and grounded spring (x1)

.194 ID Closed and grounded spring (x1)

.141 ID, .625 OD x .031 Washer

8mm ID, 18mm OD x 1mm Washer

.195 ID, .50 OD x .059 PEEK HPV Washer (x2)

-227

Removing the toggle bar:


1.

Unload model and support material.

2. Power the printer down.


3. Open chamber door and remove the head cover. See (Figure 159)
Figure 159: Head cover tab locations

Press tab in to
release head
cover

Press tab in to
release head
cover

4. Using a 764 allen wrench, loosen but do not remove the 4 tip mounting
screws. See (Figure 160)
Figure 160: Tip mounting screw locations

5. Remove the tips by pulling them downwards. See (Figure 161)

-228

Figure 161: Removing the tips

6. Using a 764 allen wrench, loosen the 2 heat shield screws. See (Figure
162)
Figure 162: Heat shield mounting screw locations

Heat shield mounting screws


7.

Remove the heat shield.

8. Using a 764 allen wrench, remove the upper spring screw. Remove the
screw, washer and spring. See (Figure 163)

-229

Figure 163: Upper spring location

Upper spring
screw

9. Using a 764 allen wrench, remove the lower spring screw. Remove the
screw, spring and washer. See (Figure 164)
Figure 164: Lower spring location

Lower spring
screw

10. Pull the toggle assembly away from the translator until the toggle assembly is at the end of the post. See (Figure 165)

-230

Figure 165: Toggle assembly positioning

11. Remove the washer from the toggle bar.


12. Remove the toggle bar by sliding out. See (Figure 166)
Figure 166: Removing toggle bar

-231

Installing the toggle bar:


1.

Align the toggle bar with the translator and reinstall the washer over the
bottom mounting post. See (Figure 167)
Figure 167: Toggle bar alignment

Reinstall washer

Align toggle bar

2. Push the toggle assembly back into position.


3. Reinstall the lower washer and spring.
4. Using a 764 allen wrench, reinstall the lower spring screw.
5. Reinstall the upper spring and washer.
6. Using a 764 allen wrench, reinstall the upper spring screw.
7.

Using a 764 allen wrench, reinstall the heat shield.

8. Reinstall the model tip (right side) and support tip (left side) by pushing
up into place.
9. Using a 764 allen wrench tighten the tip mounting screws.
10. Reinstall the head cover.
11. Power the printer up.
12. Perform calibrations. See Offset Calibrations on page 338

-232

Head Board
Required tools

16
4

nut driver or standard screwdriver

nut driver

Hardware

10-32 x 38 slotted screws (x7)

6-32 x 14 slotted screws (x6)

Removing the head board


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the right side
access panel mounting screws and remove the panel. See Figure 168.
Figure 168: Right side access panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 7
mounting screws.

4. Remove the head cover by pressing the tabs and pulling the cover outward. See Figure 169.

-233

Figure 169: Head cover tab locations

Press tab in to
release head
cover

Press tab in to
release head
cover

5. Remove the air plenum by pressing in the upper and lower tabs and
pulling outward. See Figure 170.
Figure 170: Air plenum tab locations

Press in tab to
release air
plenum

Press in tab to
release air
plenum

Press in tab to
release air
plenum

Press in tab to
release air
plenum

6. Disconnect the model and support material tubes. See Figure 171.

-234

Figure 171: Material tube and retaining ring locations


Press down on
the retaining
rings

Lift the
material tubes
out of the
rings

7.

Remove the thermocouple wires from the wire retaining clip on the head
board. See Figure 172.
Figure 172: Retaining clip location

Remove the
thermocouple wires
from the retaining clip

8. Disconnect the umbilical cable by pressing in on the tab and pulling


upwards. See Figure 173.

-235

Figure 173: Umbilical cable location

Disconnect the
umbilical cable

9. Disconnect the model and support heater cables by pressing in on the


tabs and pulling outward. See Figure 174.
Figure 174: Model and support heater cable locations

Disconnect the
model side heater
cable

Disconnect the
support side
heater cable

10. Disconnect the toggle sensor cable from the head board by pressing in
on the tab and pulling outward. See Figure 175.
Figure 175: Toggle sensor cable location

Disconnect the toggle


sensor cable from the
head board

11. Gently disconnect the toggle sensor cable from the toggle sensor by pulling the cable outward. See Figure 176.

-236

Figure 176: Disconnect the toggle sensor cable from the toggle sensor

Gently disconnect the


toggle sensor cable

12. Using a 14 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the toggle sensor
cable retaining clips. See Figure 177.
Figure 177: Toggle sensor cable retaining clip locations

Remove the 2 toggle


sensor cable retaining clips

13. Feed the toggle sensor cable out through the head board. See Figure
178.
Figure 178: Removing the toggle sensor cable from the head board

Feed toggle sensor cable


through the head board

14. Disconnect the substrate sensor cable and filament motor cables from
the rear of the head board by pressing the tabs in and pulling outward.
See Figure 179.

-237

Figure 179: Rear head board cable locations


Disconnect the 3
cables

15. Using a 14 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 4 head


board mounting screws. See Figure 180.
Figure 180: Remove the head board mounting screws

Remove the head board


mounting screws

Installing the head board


1.

Align the head board with the mounting holes.

2. Using a 14 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 4 mounting


screws.
3. Reconnect the substrate sensor cable and the 2 filament motor cables to
the rear of the head board.
4. Feed the toggle sensor cable through the head board.
5. Using a 14 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the toggle sensor wire clips.
6. Reconnect the toggle sensor cable to the toggle sensor.
7.

Reconnect the toggle sensor cable to the head board.

8. Reconnect the model and support heater cables.


9. Reconnect the umbilical cable.
10. Place the thermocouple wires in the wire retaining clip.
11. Reconnect the model and support material tubes.
12. Reinstall the air plenum.
13. Reinstall the head cover.
14. Reinstall the right side access cover.
15. Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
16. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-238

TC Amp board
Required Tools

16
4

nut driver or standard screwdriver

nut driver

Hardware

10-32 x 38 slotted screws (x7)

6-32 x 14 slotted screws (x3)

Removing the TC Amp board


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Remove the right side access panel mounting screws with a 516 nut
driver or standard screwdriver and remove the panel. See Figure 181.
Figure 181: Right side access panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 7
mounting screws.

4. Disconnect the umbilical cable by pressing in on the tab and pulling outward. See Figure 182.

-239

Figure 182: Disconnecting the umbilical cable

Disconnect the
umbilical cable

5. Disconnect the model and support thermocouple wires by pulling outward. See Figure 183.
Figure 183: Thermocouple wire locations

Disconnect the support


thermocouple

Disconnect the model


thermocouple

6. Using a 14 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 3 mounting


screws and remove the TC Amp board. See Figure 184.
Figure 184: TC Amp board mounting screw locations

Remove the 3
mounting screws

-240

Installing the TC Amp board


1.

Align the TC Amp board with the mounting holes.

2. Using a 14 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 3 mounting


screws.
3. Reconnect the model and support thermocouple wires.
4. Reconnect the umbilical cable.
5. Reinstall the right side access panel.
6. Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
7.

Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

Umbilical Hose
Required Tools

16 nut driver or standard screwdriver


4 nut driver

32 allen wrench
Cutters

Hardware

Wire tie
10-32 x 38 slotted screws (x7)

- 20 x 12 button head cap screws (x2)

Removing the umbilical hose


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Remove the upper electronics bay cover. See Removing the upper electronics bay cover on page 173
4. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the right side
access panel mounting screws and remove the panel. See Figure 185.

-241

Figure 185: Right side access cover mounting screw locations

Remove the 7
mounting screws.

5. Using a 14 nut driver or standard screwdriver, loosen the umbilical


hose clamp. See Figure 186.
6. Disconnect the umbilical hose from the head cooling fan and remove the
hose clamp. See Figure 186.
Figure 186: Umbilical hose clamp location

Loosen the clamp screw


and disconnect the
hose

7.

-242

Remove the head cover by pressing the tabs in and pulling outward. See
Figure 187.

Figure 187: Head cover tab locations

Press in tab to
release head
cover

Press in tab to
release head cover

8. Remove the air plenum by pressing in on the tabs and pulling outward.
See Figure 188.
Figure 188: Air plenum tab locations

Press in tab to release


air plenum

Press in tab to release


air plenum

Press in tab to release


air plenum

Press in tab to release


air plenum

9. Disconnect the model and support material tubes. See Figure 189.

-243

Figure 189: Material tube and retaining ring locations


Press down on
the retaining
rings

Lift the material


tubes out of the
rings

10. Cut the wire tie from around the umbilical hose. See Figure 190.
Figure 190: Umbilical hose wire tie location

Cut and remove the


wire tie

11. Remove the energy chain mounting screws from the translator with a
5 allen wrench. See Figure 191.
32
Figure 191: Remove the energy chain mounting screws

Remove the 2
mounting screws

12. Straighten the energy chain and feed the umbilical hose through to
remove.

-244

Installing the umbilical hose


1.

Feed the umbilical hose through the energy chain.

2. Align the energy chain with the mounting holes.


3. Using a 532 allen wrench, reinstall the energy chain mounting screws.
4. Reinstall a wire tie around the umbilical hose. See Figure 192.
Figure 192: Umbilical hose wire tie location

Reinstall the wire tie

5. Reconnect the model and support material tubes.


6. Reinstall the air plenum.
7.

Reinstall the head cover.

8. Reconnect the umbilical hose to the head cooling fan.


9. Using a 14 nut driver or standard screwdriver, tighten the umbilical
hose clamp.
10. Align the right side access panel with the mounting holes.
11. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the right side
access panel mounting screws.
12. Reinstall the upper electronics bay cover. See Installing the upper electronics bay cover on page 174
13. Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
14. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-245

Material Tubes
Required Tools

16
4

nut driver or standard screwdriver

nut driver

32

allen wrench
Cutters

Removing the material tubes


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Remove the upper electronics bay cover. See Removing the upper electronics bay cover on page 173
4. Remove the umbilical hose. See Removing the umbilical hose on
page 241
5. Feed the material tubes out through the energy chain.
Installing the material tubes
1.

Feed the material tubes through the energy chain.

2. Reinstall the umbilical hose. See Installing the umbilical hose on


page 245
3. Reinstall the upper electronics bay cover. See Installing the upper electronics bay cover on page 174
4. Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
5. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-246

Umbilical Cable
Required Tools

16

32

nut driver or standard screwdriver


Cutters
1 nut driver
4
allen wrench

Removing the umbilical cable


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Remove the upper electronics bay cover. See Removing the upper electronics bay cover on page 173
4. Remove the umbilical hose. See Removing the umbilical hose on
page 241
5. Disconnect the umbilical cable from the I/O card. See Figure 193.
Figure 193: Umbilical cable connector locations

Disconnect the 2
umbilical cables from the
I/O card

6. Disconnect the umbilical cable from the head board by pressing in on


the tab and pulling upward. See Figure 194.

-247

Figure 194: Head board connector location

Disconnect the
umbilical cable

7.

Disconnect the umbilical cable from the TC Amp board by pressing in


on the tab and pulling outward. See Figure 195.
Figure 195: TC Amp connector location

Disconnect the
umbilical cable

8. Feed the umbilical cable out through the energy chain.


Installing the umbilical cable
1.

Feed the umbilical cable through the energy chain.

2. Reconnect the umbilical cable to the TC Amp board.


3. Reconnect the umbilical cable to the head board.
4. Reconnect the umbilical cable to the I/O card.
5. Reinstall the umbilical hose. See Installing the umbilical hose on
page 245
6. Reinstall the upper electronics bay cover. See Installing the upper electronics bay cover on page 174
7.

Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164

8. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-248

XY Table Components
Y Home Sensor
Required Tools

nut driver or standard screwdriver.

Hardware

6-32 x 38 slotted screw (x1)

Removing the Y home sensor


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Disconnect the Y home cable by pressing in on the tab and pulling outward. See Figure 196.
Figure 196: Y Home sensor cable location

Disconnect the Y
Home cable

3. Using a 14 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the mounting


screw. See Figure 197.

-249

Figure 197: Y home sensor mounting screw location

Remove the
mounting screw

4. Remove the Y home sensor.


Installing the Y Home Sensor
1.

Align the Y Home Sensor with the mounting hole.

2. Using a 14 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the mounting


screw.
3. Reconnect the Y Home cable.
4. Install the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

Y EOT (End of Travel) Sensor


Required Tools

4 nut driver or standard screwdriver.

Hardware

6-32 x 38 slotted screw (x1)

Removing the Y EOT sensor


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Disconnect the Y EOT cable by pressing in on the tab and pulling outward. See Figure 198.

-250

Figure 198: Y EOT sensor cable location

Disconnect the Y
EOT cable

3. Using a 14 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the mounting


screw. See Figure 199.
Figure 199: Y EOT sensor mounting screw location

Remove the
mounting screw

4. Remove the Y EOT sensor.


Installing the Y EOT Sensor
1.

Align the Y EOT Sensor with the mounting hole.

2. Using a 14 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the mounting


screw.
3. Reconnect the Y EOT cable.
4. Install the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-251

X Motor
Required Tools

16
2

nut driver or standard screwdriver.

box wrench.

32

allen wrench.

allen wrench.
Cutters.

Hardware

Wire tie
10-32 x 38 slotted screws (x16)

10-32 x 12 slotted screws (x4)

8-32 x 12 socket head cap screws (x4)

Removing the X motor


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 7 left side
access panel mounting screws and remove the left side access panel.
See Figure 200.

-252

Figure 200: Left side access panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 7
mounting screws.

4. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 7 right side
access panel mounting screws and remove the right side access panel.
See Figure 201.
Figure 201: Right side access panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 7
mounting screws.

5. Using a 12 box wrench, remove the X belt tension adjuster by loosening the inside nut and then backing the bolt out of the mount. See Figure
202.
6. Remove the tensioning fork and pulley from the X motor belt.

-253

Figure 202: X belt tension adjustment bolt location

Loosen X belt
adjustment bolt

7.

Using a cutters, remove the X motor cable connector wire tie. See Figure
203.
Figure 203: X motor wire tie locations

Cut and remove


wire tie

8. Disconnect the X motor cable by pressing in on the tab and pulling outward. See Figure 204.

-254

Figure 204: X motor cable connector location

Disconnect X
motor cable

9. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 2 X energy


chain mounting bracket mounting screws. See Figure 205.
Figure 205: X motor energy chain mounting bracket mounting screw
locations

Remove the 2
mounting screws

10. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 4 mounting
screws from the X motor mounting bracket. See Figure 206.

-255

Figure 206: X motor mounting bracket mounting screw locations

Remove the 4
mounting screws

11. Using a 964 allen wrench, remove the 4 X motor mounting screws from
the mounting bracket. See Figure 207.
Figure 207: X motor mounting screw locations

Remove the 4
mounting screws

12. Remove the X motor from the X motor mounting bracket.


Installing the X motor
1.

Place the X belt around the X motor pulley.

2. Align the X motor into the X motor mounting bracket making sure the X
motor cable faces the front of the printer.
3. Using a 964 allen wrench, reinstall the 4 X motor mounting screws.
4. Align the X motor mounting bracket with the mounting holes.
5. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 4 X motor
mounting bracket mounting screws.

-256

6. Align the X motor energy chain mounting bracket with the mounting
holes.
7.

Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 2 X motor


energy chain mounting screws.

8. Reconnect the X motor cable.


9. Reinstall a wire tie around the X motor cable connector. See Figure 208.
Figure 208: X motor wire tie locations

Reinstall wire tie

10. Move the Head Assembly to the full right travel position within the build
envelope (as viewed from the front of the printer).
11. Insert the zero gauge block into the gauge. See Figure 209.
12. Loosen the adjustment screw and slide the dial indicator assembly up or
down to set the zero reading: The large hand should be on 0 and the
small hand on 5.
13. Tighten the adjustment screw (do not over tighten the screw) and recheck
the reading.
14. Remove the zero block gauge block from the fixture.

-257

Figure 209: Tension gauge zero setting

Adjustment screw

Zero gauge block

15. Position the dial indicator on the rear section of the X-Drive belt - centered between the Head Assembly and the left side of the build envelope. (Figure 210.)
Figure 210: X belt tension location

16. Check the tension:


The large hand on the gauge should read between 25 and 35 mils, and
the small hand should read between 4 and 5. (Figure 211.)

-258

Figure 211: Gauge reading at correct X belt tension (Shading indicates


acceptable range)

17. If the tension is out of the range specified above, adjust the belt tension
by turning the X belt tensioning nut on the X-Drive Idler/Tension Adjust
gear. (Figure 212.)
Figure 212: X-Drive Belt Tension Adjustment

X belt tension bolt

18. Remove the belt fixture and run the head back and forth several times.
19. Continue to adjust and check the tension until the tension meets specification.

-259

Y Motor
Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.

64

allen wrench.

Hardware

10-32 x 38 slotted screws (x11)

8-32 x 12 socket head cap screws (x4)

Removing the Y motor


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Remove the upper electronics bay cover. See Removing the upper electronics bay cover on page 173
4. Remove the left side access panel. See Figure 213.
Figure 213: Left side access panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 7
mounting screws.

5. Disconnect the Y motor cable by pressing in on the tab and pulling


upward. See Figure 214.

-260

Figure 214: Y motor cable location

Disconnect the Y
motor cable

6. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 4 Y motor


mounting bracket mounting screws. See Figure 215.
Figure 215: Y motor mounting bracket mounting screw locations

Remove the 4
mounting screws

7.

Using a 964 allen wrench, remove the 4 Y motor mounting screws. See
Figure 216.

-261

Figure 216: Y motor mounting screw locations

Remove the 4
mounting screws

8. Remove the Y motor.


Installing the Y motor
1.

Align the Y motor with the Y motor mounting bracket, making sure the Y
motor cable faces the back of the printer.

2. Using a 964 allen wrench, reinstall the 4 Y motor mounting screws.


3. Align the Y motor mounting bracket with mounting holes.
4. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, loosely reinstall the Y
motor mounting bracket mounting screws.
5. Place the Y motor belt around the Y motor pulley.
6. Slide the Y motor mounting bracket up until the Y belt is tight.
7.

Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, securely fasten the Y


motor mounting bracket mounting screws.

8. Reconnect the Y motor cable.


9. Align the left side access panel with the mounting holes.
10. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the left side
access panel mounting screws.
11. Reinstall the upper electronics bay cover. See Installing the upper electronics bay cover on page 174
12. Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
13. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-262

Y Motor Belt
Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.


Dial indicator and belt tension gauge assembly

Hardware

10-32 x 38 slotted screws (x30)

3-16 x 1 fender washer

Removing the Y Motor Belt


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Remove the upper electronics bay cover. See Removing the upper electronics bay cover on page 173
4. Remove the left side access panel. See Figure 217.

-263

Figure 217: Left side access panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 7
mounting screws.

5. Disconnect the material bay cable from the printer.


6. Remove the Front Panel. See Removing the front panel on page 166
7.

Remove the Electronics Bay. See Removing the Electronics Bay on


page 175

8. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the right side
access panel mounting screws and remove the right side access panel.
See Figure 218.
Figure 218: Right side access panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 7
mounting screws.

9. Using a 516 box wrench, remove the outer Y belt retaining clip mounting screws from the left side. See Figure 219.
10. Using a 516 box wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the inner Y belt
retaining clip mounting screws from the left side. See Figure 219.
11. Pull the left side Y belt out from the retaining clip.

-264

Figure 219: Left side Y belt retaining clip mounting screw locations

Remove the outer


mounting screws

Loosen, but do not


remove the inner
mounting screws

12. Using a 516 box wrench, remove the outer Y belt retaining clip mounting screws from the right side. See Figure 220.
13. Using a 516 box wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the inner Y belt
retaining clip mounting screws from the right side. See Figure 220.
14. Pull the right side Y belt out from the retaining clip.
Figure 220: Right side Y belt retaining clip mounting screw locations
Remove the outer
mounting screws

Loosen, but do not


remove the inner
mounting screws

15. Decrease the Y belt tension by turning the tensioning nut, see Figure 221.

-265

Figure 221: Y drive belt tension adjustment

Y-Drive Belt
Tension Adjusting
Nut

16. Disconnect the head cooling fan. See Figure 222.


Figure 222: Disconnect head cooling fan J258

Disconnect J258

17. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the head cooling fan mounting bracket screws. See Figure 223.

-266

Figure 223: Head cooling fan mounting bracket screw locations

18. Let head cooling fan hang off to side.


19. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 4 foam
insert retaining screws and washers. See Figure 224.
Figure 224: Foam insert retaining screw locations

20. Remove the foam insert.


21. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, loosen but do not
remove the 4 Y motor mounting bracket mounting screws. See Figure
225.

-267

Figure 225: Y motor mounting bracket screw locations

22. Remove the Y motor belt from the Y motor pulley. See Figure 226.
Figure 226: Y motor belt location

23. Locate the 2 lower Y drive rod mounting screws. See Figure 227.

-268

Figure 227: Lower Y drive rod mounting screw locations

Lower Y drive rod mounting


screw locations

24. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 2 Y drive
rod mounting screws. See Figure 228.
Figure 228: Y drive rod mounting screws

Left side mounting screw

Right side mounting screw

25. Locate and remove the 4 upper Y drive rod mounting screws with a 516
nut driver or standard screwdriver. See Figure 229.

-269

Figure 229: Upper Y drive rod mounting screw locations

26. Lift the Y drive rod and slide the Y motor belt out of the printer and discard. See Figure 230.
Figure 230: Remove Y motor belt

-270

Installing the Y Motor Belt


1.

Slide the Y motor belt over the Y drive rod.

2. Align Y drive rod with the 6 mounting holes.


3. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 6 Y drive
rod mounting screws.
4. Place the Y motor belt around the Y motor pulley.
5. Lift the Y motor until the Y belt is tight and use a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver to tighten the 4 Y motor mounting bracket mounting
screws.
6. Align the foam insert over the mounting brackets.
7.

Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver reinstall the 4 foam


retaining screws and washers.

8. Align the head cooling fan mounting bracket and Use a 516 nut driver
or standard screwdriver to reinstall the 2 mounting bracket screws.
9. Reconnect the head cooling fan.
10. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver reinstall the left side
access panel.
11. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver reinstall the right side
access panel.
12. Reinstall the Electronics Bay. See Installing the electronics bay on
page 176
13. Reinstall the upper electronics bay cover. See Installing the upper electronics bay cover on page 174
14. Place the left and right Y belts into the retaining clips. Do not tighten the
retaining clips at this time.
15. Tension the Y belts. See Checking/Adjusting the Y-Drive Belt Tension
on page 384
16. Reinstall the left and right side access panels.
17. Reinstall the front panel. See Installing the front panel on page 168
18. Reinstall the Side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
19. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162
20. Reconnect the material bay cable, network cable and power cable.

-271

Y Drive Rod
Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.


Dial indicator and belt tension gauge assembly

Hardware

10-32 x 38 slotted screws (x30)

3-16 x 1 fender washer

Removing the Y Drive Rod


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Remove the upper electronics bay cover. See Removing the upper electronics bay cover on page 173
4. Remove the left side access panel. See Figure 231.

-272

Figure 231: Left side access panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 7
mounting screws.

5. Disconnect the material bay cable from the printer.


6. Remove the Front Panel. See Removing the front panel on page 166
7.

Remove the Electronics Bay. See Removing the Electronics Bay on


page 175

8. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the right side
access panel mounting screws and remove the right side access panel.
See Figure 232.
Figure 232: Right side access panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 7
mounting screws.

9. Using a 516 box wrench, remove the outer Y belt retaining clip mounting screws from the left side. See Figure 233.
10. Using a 516 box wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the inner Y belt
retaining clip mounting screws from the left side. See Figure 233.
11. Pull the left side Y belt out from the retaining clip.

-273

Figure 233: Left side Y belt retaining clip mounting screw locations

Remove the outer


mounting screws

Loosen, but do not


remove the inner
mounting screws

12. Using a 516 box wrench, remove the outer Y belt retaining clip mounting screws from the right side. See Figure 234.
13. Using a 516 box wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the inner Y belt
retaining clip mounting screws from the right side. See Figure 234.
14. Pull the right side Y belt out from the retaining clip.
Figure 234: Right side Y belt retaining clip mounting screw locations
Remove the outer
mounting screws

Loosen, but do not


remove the inner
mounting screws

15. Decrease the Y belt tension by turning the tensioning nut (Figure 235.).

-274

Figure 235: Y drive belt tension adjustment

Y-Drive Belt
Tension Adjusting
Nut

16. Disconnect the head cooling fan. See Figure 236.


Figure 236: Disconnect head cooling fan J258

Disconnect J258

17. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the head cooling fan mounting bracket screws. See Figure 237.

-275

Figure 237: Head cooling fan mounting bracket screw locations

18. Let head cooling fan hang off to side.


19. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 4 foam
insert retaining screws and washers. See Figure 238.
Figure 238: Foam insert retaining screw locations

20. Remove the foam insert.


21. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, loosen but do not
remove the 4 Y motor mounting bracket mounting screws. See Figure
239.

-276

Figure 239: Y motor mounting bracket screw locations

22. Remove the Y motor belt from the Y motor pulley. See Figure 240.
Figure 240: Y motor belt location

23. Locate the 2 lower Y drive rod mounting screws. See Figure 241.

-277

Figure 241: Lower Y drive rod mounting screw locations

Lower Y drive rod mounting


screw locations

24. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 2 Y drive
rod mounting screws. See Figure 242.
Figure 242: Y drive rod mounting screws

Left side mounting screw

Right side mounting screw

25. Locate and remove the 4 upper Y drive rod mounting screws with a 516
nut driver or standard screwdriver. See Figure 243.

-278

Figure 243: Upper Y drive rod mounting screw locations

26. Lift the Y drive rod, slide out through the Y belts and discard. See Figure
244.
Figure 244: Remove Y drive rod

-279

Installing the Y Drive Rod


1.

Slide the Y drive rod through the Y belts and into position.

2. Align Y drive rod with the 6 mounting holes.


3. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 6 Y drive
rod mounting screws.
4. Place the Y motor belt around the Y motor pulley.
5. Lift the Y motor until the Y belt is tight and use a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver to tighten the 4 Y motor mounting bracket mounting
screws.
6. Align the foam insert over the mounting brackets.
7.

Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver reinstall the 4 foam


retaining screws and washers.

8. Align the head cooling fan mounting bracket and Use a 516 nut driver
or standard screwdriver to reinstall the 2 mounting bracket screws.
9. Reconnect the head cooling fan.
10. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver reinstall the left side
access panel.
11. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver reinstall the right side
access panel.
12. Reinstall the Electronics Bay. See Installing the electronics bay on
page 176
13. Reinstall the upper electronics bay cover. See Installing the upper electronics bay cover on page 174
14. Place the left and right Y belts into the retaining clips. Do not tighten the
retaining clips at this time.
15. Tension the Y belts. See Checking/Adjusting the Y-Drive Belt Tension
on page 384
16. Reinstall the left and right side access panels.
17. Reinstall the front panel. See Installing the front panel on page 168
18. Reinstall the Side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
19. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162
20. Reconnect the material bay cable, network cable and power cable.

-280

XY Table
Required Tools

Head bracket, dial indicator and belt tension gauge assembly

Y rod spacer (x2)

Leveling wrench

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.

16

box wrench.

box wrench.

32

allen wrench.

32

allen wrench.

8 allen wrench.
Cutters.
Z Guide rod stand off (x2)

-281

Hardware

Wire tie
10-32 x 38 slotted screws (x14)

10-32 x 12 slotted screws (x4)

10-32 x 12 socket head cap screws (x4)

8-32 x 12 socket head cap screws (x4)

4 - 20 x 12 button head cap screws (x2)

Removing the XY table


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Remove the front panel. See Removing the front panel on page 166
4. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the left side
access panel mounting screws and remove the left side access panel.
See Figure 245.

-282

Figure 245: Left side access panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 7
mounting screws.

5. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the right side
access panel mounting screws and remove the right side access panel.
See Figure 246.
Figure 246: Right side access panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 7
mounting screws.

6. Remove the toggle head assembly. See Removing the toggle head
assembly on page 212
7.

Remove the head board. See Removing the head board on page 233

8. Remove the TC Amp board. See Removing the TC Amp board on


page 239
9. Cut the wire tie from the umbilical hose. See Figure 247.

-283

Figure 247: Umbilical hose wire tie location

Cut and remove


the wire tie

10. Using a 532 allen wrench, remove the 2 energy chain mounting
screws. See Figure 248.
Figure 248: Energy chain mounting screw locations

Remove the 2
mounting screws

11. Remove the substrate sensor. See Removing the substrate sensor on
page 220
12. Using a 12 box wrench, remove the X belt tension adjuster by loosening the inside nut and then backing the bolt out of the mount. See Figure
249.
13. Remove the tensioning fork and pulley from the X motor belt.

-284

Figure 249: X belt tension adjustment bolt location

Loosen X belt
adjustment bolt

14. Using a cutters, remove the X motor cable connector wire tie. See Figure
250.
Figure 250: X motor wire tie locations

Cut and remove


wire tie

15. Disconnect the X motor cable by pressing in on the tab and pulling outward. See Figure 251.

-285

Figure 251: X motor cable connector location

Disconnect X
motor cable

16. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 2 X energy
chain mounting bracket mounting screws and set bracket to the side. See
Figure 252.
Figure 252: X motor energy chain mounting bracket mounting screw
locations

Remove the 2
mounting screws

17. Using a 516 box wrench, remove the outer Y belt retaining clip mounting screws from the left side. See Figure 253.
18. Using a 516 box wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the inner Y belt
retaining clip mounting screws from the left side. See Figure 253.
19. Pull the left side Y belt out from the retaining clip.

-286

Figure 253: Left side Y belt retaining clip mounting screw locations

Remove the outer


mounting screws

Loosen, but do not


remove the inner
mounting screws

20. Using a 516 box wrench, remove the outer Y belt retaining clip mounting screws from the right side. See Figure 254.
21. Using a 516 box wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the inner Y belt
retaining clip mounting screws from the right side. See Figure 254.
22. Pull the right side Y belt out from the retaining clip.
Figure 254: Right side Y belt retaining clip mounting screw locations
Remove the outer
mounting screws

Loosen, but do not


remove the inner
mounting screws

23. Move the translator to the rear of the printer.


24. Using a 516 nut driver, remove the right side X guide rod mounting
screws. See Figure 255.

-287

Figure 255: Right side X guide rod mounting screw locations

Remove the 2 right


side X guide rod
mounting screws

25. Using a 532 allen wrench, remove the right side front Y guide rod
mounting screw. See Figure 256.
Figure 256: Right side front Y guide rod mounting screw location

Remove the right front


Y guide rod mounting
screw

26. Using a 532 allen wrench, remove the right side rear Y guide rod
mounting screws and remove the right side Y guide rod. See Figure 257.

-288

Figure 257: Right side rear Y guide rod mounting screw location

Remove the right rear


Y guide rod mounting
screw

27. Disconnect the Y Home sensor cable by pressing in on the tab and pulling outward. See Figure 258.
Figure 258: Y EOT sensor wire connector location

Disconnect the Y
Home cable

28. Using a 532 allen wrench, remove the left side front Y guide rod mounting screw. See Figure 259.

-289

Figure 259: Left side front Y guide rod mounting screw location

Remove the left front Y


guide rod mounting
screw

29. Using a 532 allen wrench, remove the left side rear Y guide rod mounting screw. See Figure 260.
Figure 260: Left side rear Y guide rod mounting screw location

Remove the left rear Y


guide rod mounting
screw

30. Lift the front of the left Y guide rod upward until it is near the top of the
frame.
31. Rotate the left side Y guide rod towards the center of the printer and
lower the guide rod.
32. Pull the left side Y guide rod out towards the door opening.
33. Angle the rest of the XY table out through the chamber door to remove
from the printer.

-290

Installing the XY table


1.

Insert the zero gauge block into the gauge. See Figure 261.

2. Loosen the adjustment screw and slide the dial indicator assembly up or
down to set the zero reading: The large hand should be on 0 and the
small hand on 5.
3. Tighten the adjustment screw (do not over tighten the screw) and recheck
the reading.
4. Remove the zero block gauge block from the fixture.
Figure 261: Tension gauge zero setting

Adjustment screw

Zero gauge block

5. Position the dial indicator on the top section of the Y-Drive belt at the
center point of the belt. See Figure 262.
Figure 262: Y-Drive Belt Tension Check

Y-Drive Belt clamp (one


on each side).

Dial Indicator position for YDrive belt tension check.

-291

6. The gauge should read between 0.425 and 0.435 mils. See Figure
263.
Figure 263: Gauge readings

Service Limit

7.

Adjustment Limit

If the tension is not within specification, locate the Y belt tension adjustment nut on the front of the system. See Figure 262.

8. Adjust (increase/decrease) the tension by turning the tensioning nut (Figure 264.) so that the dial indicator reads between 0.425 and 0.435
mils.
Figure 264: Y drive belt tension adjustment

Y-Drive Belt
Tension Adjusting
Nut

9. Remove the belt fixture and move the belt forward and back several
times.
10. Reattach the belt tension gauge and recheck the tension.
11. Continue to adjust and check the tension until the tension meets specification.

-292

12. Push the left side Y guide rod in towards the back of the printer.
13. Rotate the left side Y guide rod towards the left side of the printer and
raise the guide rod to the top of the frame.
14. Lower the left side Y guide rod into its mounting location.
15. Using a 532 allen wrench, loosely reinstall the left side rear Y guide rod
mounting screw.
16. Using a 532 allen wrench, loosely reinstall the left side front Y guide
rod mounting screw.
17. Reconnect the Y home sensor cable.
18. Align the right side Y guide rod with the mounting holes.
19. Using a 532 allen wrench, loosely reinstall the right side rear Y guide
rod mounting screw.
20. Using a 532 allen wrench, loosely reinstall the right side front Y guide
rod mounting screw.
21. Align the X guide rods with the mounting holes.
22. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, loosely reinstall the
right side X guide rod mounting screws.
23. Align the X motor energy chain mounting bracket with the mounting
holes.
24. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 2 X motor
energy chain mounting screws.
25. Reconnect the X motor cable.
26. Reinstall a wire tie around the X motor cable connector. See Figure 265.
Figure 265: X motor wire tie locations

Reinstall wire tie

27. Place the right side Y belt into the retaining clip.
28. Place the left side Y belt into the retaining clip.
29. Slide the translator to the back of the printer.

-293

30. Using a 516 box wrench, tighten the right side Y belt clamp mounting
screws.
31. Using a 516 box wrench, tighten the left side Y belt clamp mounting
screws.
32. Using a 532 allen wrench, securely fasten the left rear Y guide rod
mounting screw.
33. Reinstall the head board. See Installing the head board on page 238
34. Reinstall the TC Amp board. See Installing the TC Amp board on
page 241
35. Reinstall the substrate sensor. See Installing the substrate sensor on
page 222
36. Reinstall the toggle head assembly. See Installing the toggle head
assembly on page 217
37. Reinstall the toggle sensor. See Installing the toggle sensor on
page 226
38. Install the 2 XY table alignment brackets to the center of the Y guide
rods. See Figure 266.
39. Adjust the alignment brackets as needed.
40. Using a 18 allen wrench, tighten the alignment bracket adjustment
screws.
Figure 266: XY Table alignment bracket center mounting location

Center the alignment


brackets

41. Move 1 alignment bracket to the front of the printer. See Figure 267.
42. Move the translator to the center of the XY table.
43. Move 1 alignment bracket to the rear of the printer. See Figure 267.

-294

Figure 267: XY Table alignment bracket mounting locations

Place an alignment
bracket at the front of the
printer

Place an alignment
bracket at the back of the
printer

44. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, loosen but do not
remove the left side X guide rod mounting screws.
45. Center the Y guide rods in the mounting slots and loosely tighten. See
Figure 268.
WARNING: Failure to center the Y guide rods before tightening the
X guide rod screws will result in X guide rod misalignment.
Figure 268: Center Y guide rods

Position the Y guide rods so the


screw and washer are in the
center

46. Slide the translator to the left side of the printer.


47. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, securely fasten the left
side X guide rod mounting screws.
48. Slide the translator to the right side of the printer.
49. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, securely fasten the right
side X guide rod mounting screws.

-295

50. Raise the Z stage up near the XY table and hold in place using 2 Z
guide rod stand offs. See Figure 269.
Figure 269: Z guide rod stand off locations

51. Using a black marker or pen, mark the 4 corners of the Z stage as
shown in Figure 270.
Figure 270: Marking the 4 corners of the Z stage

Mark the 4 corners of


the Z stage

-296

52. Attach the XY leveling bracket and dial indicator to the head. See Figure
271.
Figure 271: XY Leveling bracket location

53. Move the dial indicator to the back left (BL) corner and zero the dial
indicator.
54. Move the dial indicator to the front left (FL) corner and write down the
value.
55. Move the dial indicator to the front right (FR) corner and write down the
value.
56. Move the dial indicator to the back right (BR) corner and write down the
value.
57. Enter the values that are written down into the XY level worksheet. Use
the 8x6 worksheet for HP Designjet 3D, see Figure 272. Use the 8x8
worksheet for HP Designjet Color 3D, see Figure 273.

-297

Figure 272: HP Designjet 3D measurement points and worksheet

-298

BL

BR

FL

FR

Figure 273: HP Designjet Color 3D measurement points and worksheet

BL

BR

FL

FR

-299

58. Move the dial indicator to the front left of the Z stage and zero the dial
indicator.
59. Using the XY guide rod leveling fixture, adjust the rod up or down until
the dial indicator reads the value the calculator has given. See Figure
274.
Figure 274: XY guide rod leveling fixture

60. Using a 532 allen wrench, securely fasten the front left Y guide rod
mounting screw.
61. Move the dial indicator to the front right of the Z stage and zero the dial
indicator.
62. Using the XY guide rod leveling fixture, adjust the rod up or down until
the dial indicator reads the value the calculator has given.
63. Using a 532 allen wrench, securely fasten the front right Y guide rod
mounting screw.
64. Move the dial indicator to the rear right of the Z stage and zero the dial
indicator.
65. Using the XY guide rod leveling fixture, adjust the rod up or down until
the dial indicator reads the value the calculator has given.
66. Using a 532 allen wrench, securely fasten the rear right Y guide rod
mounting screw.
67. Repeat steps 53- 66 until the XY table is completely level.
68. Remove the XY guide rod alignment brackets.
69. Remove the XY table leveling bracket and dial indicator.
70. Move the Head Assembly to the full right travel position within the build
envelope (as viewed from the front of the printer).
71. Insert the zero gauge block into the gauge. See Figure 275.
72. Loosen the adjustment screw and insert the dial indicator into the fixture.
73. Adjust the depth of the dial indicator so the gauge reads 0.500 mils
and tighten the adjustment screw. Recheck the reading.
74. Remove the zero block gauge block from the fixture.

-300

Figure 275: Tension gauge zero setting

Adjustment screw

Zero gauge block

75. Position the dial indicator on the rear section of the X-Drive belt - centered between the Head Assembly and the left side of the build envelope. See Figure 276.
Figure 276: X belt tension location

76. Check the tension:


The gauge should read between 0.425 and 0.435 mils. See Figure 277.

-301

Figure 277: Gauge reading at correct X belt tension (Shading indicates


acceptable range)

77. If the tension is out of the range specified above, adjust the belt tension
by turning the X belt tensioning nut on the X-Drive Idler/Tension Adjust
gear. See Figure 278.
Figure 278: X-Drive Belt Tension Adjustment

X belt tension bolt

78. Remove the belt fixture and run the head back and forth several times.
79. Continue to adjust and check the tension until the tension meets specification.
80. Repeat steps 68 - 71 to zero the dial indicator.
81. Reinstall a wire tie around the umbilical hose. See Figure 279.

-302

Figure 279: Umbilical hose wire tie location

Reinstall
wire tie

82. Align the left side access panel with the mounting holes.
83. Using a 516 nut driver, reinstall the 7 left side access panel mounting
screws.
84. Align the right side access panel with the mounting holes.
85. Using a 516 nut driver, reinstall the 7 right side access panel mounting
screws.
86. Reinstall the front cover. See Installing the front panel on page 168
87. Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
88. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162
89. Power up the printer.
90. From the display panel press Maintenance > Machine > Tips.
91. Perform Z calibration. See Z Calibration on page 338
92. Perform XY Offset calibration. See XY Tip Calibration on page 340
93. Perform Part Based calibration. See Performing part based calibration
for HP Designjet 3D with the HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software on
page 352.

-303

Z Stage Components
Z Home Sensor
Required Tools

nut driver or standard screwdriver.

Hardware

6-32 x 38 slotted screw (x1)

Removing the Z home sensor


1.

Open the chamber door.

2. Lower the Z stage all of the way down.


3. Disconnect the Z home sensor cable by pressing in on the tab and pulling outward. See Figure 280.
Figure 280: Z home sensor cable location

Disconnect Z Home
cable

4. Using a 14 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the mounting


screw. See Figure 281.

-304

Figure 281: Z home sensor mounting screw location

Remove mounting screw

5. Remove the Z home sensor.


Installing the Z home sensor
1.

Align the Z home sensor with the mounting hole.

2. Reinstall the mounting screw with a 1/4 nut driver or standard screwdriver.
3. Reconnect the Z home cable.
4. Close the chamber door.

Z EOT (End of Travel) Sensor


Required Tools

4 nut driver or standard screwdriver.

Hardware

6-32 x 38 slotted screw (x1)

Removing the Z EOT sensor


1.

Open the chamber door.

2. Raise the Z stage all of the way up.


3. Disconnect the Z EOT sensor cable by pressing in on the tab and pulling
outward. See Figure 282.

-305

Figure 282: Z EOT sensor cable location

Disconnect the Z EOT cable

4. Using a 14 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the mounting


screw. See Figure 283.
Figure 283: Remove the mounting screw

Remove the mounting screw

5. Remove the Z EOT Sensor.


Installing the Z EOT sensor
1.

Align the Z EOT sensor with the mounting hole.

2. Using a 14 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the mounting


screw.
3. Reconnect the Z EOT sensor cable.
4. Close the chamber door.

-306

Chamber Fans
Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.

16

box wrench

Hardware

10-32 x 38 slotted screws (x8)

8-32 x 12 slotted screws (x4)

Removing the right side chamber fan


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 4 mounting
screws from the right side heater panel. See Figure 284.
Figure 284: Right side heater panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 4 mounting


screws

4. Using a 516 box wrench, remove the 2 chamber fan mounting screws.
See Figure 285.
Figure 285: Right side chamber fan mounting screw locations

-307

Remove the 2
mounting screws

Installing the right side chamber fan


1.

Align chamber fan with mounting holes.

2. Using a 516 box wrench, reinstall the 2 chamber fan mounting screws.
3. Align the right side heater panel with the mounting holes.
4. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 4 mounting
screws for the right side heater panel.
5. Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
6. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162
Removing the left side chamber fan
1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 4 mounting
screws from the left side heater panel and remove the heater panel. See
Figure 286.

-308

Figure 286: Left side heater panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 4
mounting screws

4. Using a 516 box wrench, remove the 2 chamber fan mounting screws.
See Figure 287.
Figure 287: Left side chamber fan mounting screw locations

Remove the 2
mounting screws

Installing the left side chamber fan


1.

Align chamber fan with mounting holes.

2. Using a 516 box wrench, reinstall the 2 chamber fan mounting screws.
3. Align the left side heater panel with the mounting holes.
4. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 4 mounting
screws for the left side heater panel.
5. Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
6. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-309

Chamber Heaters
Required Tools

16
8

nut driver or standard screwdriver.

nut driver.

Hardware

10-32 x 38 slotted screws (x8)

10-32 x 12 slotted screws (x4)

10-32 x 18 nut (x4)

Removing the right side heater


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 4 mounting
screws and remove the heater panel. See Figure 288.

-310

Figure 288: Right side heater panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 4
mounting screws

4. Remove the black power wire from the right mounting post with a 38
nut driver. See Figure 289.
5. Remove the white power wire from the left mounting post with a 38 nut
driver. See Figure 289.
Figure 289: Power wire locations
Remove the white
power wire

Remove the black


power wire

6. Remove the left and right mounting screws with a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver. Do not lose the insulating washers as they are need
for reinstallation. See Figure 290.

-311

Figure 290: Right side heater mounting screw locations

Remove the
mounting screws

7.

Remove the heater.

Installing the right side heater


1.

Align the heater with the mounting posts.

2. Insert the insulating washers and reinstall the mounting screws using a
5
16 nut driver or standard screwdriver.
3. Reinstall the white power wire on the left mounting post using a 38 nut
driver.
4. Reinstall the black power wire on the right mounting post using a 38
nut driver.
5. Align the heater panel with the mounting holes.
6. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 4 heater
panel mounting screws.
7.

Install the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164

8. Install the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162
Removing the left side heater
1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 4 mounting
screws and remove the heater panel. See Figure 291.

-312

Figure 291: Left side heater panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 4
mounting screws

4. Using a 38 nut driver, remove the white power wire from the right
mounting post. See Figure 292.
5. Using a 38 nut driver, remove the black power wire from the left mounting post. See Figure 292.
Figure 292: Power wire locations

Remove the black


power wire

Remove the white


power wire

6. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the left and
right mounting screws. Do not lose the insulating washers as they are
need for reinstallation. See Figure 293.

-313

Figure 293: Left side heater mounting screw locations

Remove the mounting


screws

7.

Remove the heater.

Installing the left side heater


1.

Align the heater with the mounting posts.

2. Insert the insulating washers and reinstall the mounting screws using a
5
16 nut driver or standard screwdriver.
3. Reinstall the black power wire on the left mounting post using a 38 nut
driver.
4. Reinstall the white power wire on the right mounting post using a 38 nut
driver.
5. Align the heater panel with the mounting holes.
6. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 4 heater
panel mounting screws.
7.

Install the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164

8. Install the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-314

Thermal Fuses
Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.

Hardware

10-32 x 38 slotted screws (x8)

4-40 x 14 slotted screws (x4)

Removing the right side thermal fuse


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 4 mounting
screws and remove the right side heater panel. See Figure 294.
Figure 294: Right side heater panel mounting screw locations

Remove the 4
mounting screws

4. Disconnect the RTH1 and RTH2 spade connectors by pulling outward.


See Figure 295.

-315

Figure 295: RTH1 and RTH2 spade connector locations

Disconnect
RTH2

Disconnect
RTH1

5. Using a standard screwdriver, remove the 2 mounting screws. See Figure


296.
Figure 296: Right side thermal fuse mounting screw locations

Remove the mounting


screws

6. Remove the thermal fuse.


Installing the right side thermal fuse
1.

Align the thermal fuse with the mounting holes.

2. Using a standard screwdriver, reinstall the mounting screws.


3. Reconnect RTH1 and RTH2 spade connectors.
4. Align the heater panel with the 4 mounting screws.
5. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 4 mounting
screws.
6. Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
7.

-316

Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

Removing the left side thermal fuse


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 4 mounting
screws from the left side heater panel and remove the heater panel. See
Figure 297.
Figure 297: Left side heater panel mounting screw locations

Remove the mounting


screws

4. Disconnect the LTH1 and LTH2 spade connectors by pulling outward.


See Figure 298.
Figure 298: LTH1 and LTH2 spade connector locations

Disconnect
LTH1

Disconnect
LTH2

5. Using a standard screwdriver, remove the 2 mounting screws. See Figure


299.

-317

Figure 299: Left side thermal fuse mounting screw locations

Remove the
mounting screws

6. Remove the thermal fuse.


Installing the left side thermal fuse
1.

Align the thermal fuse with the mounting holes.

2. Using a standard screwdriver, reinstall the 2 mounting screws.


3. Reconnect LTH1 and LTH2 spade connectors.
4. Align the heater panel with the 4 mounting holes.
5. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the 4 mounting
screws.
6. Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
7.

Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-318

Chamber Thermocouple
Required Tools

16

nut driver.
standard screwdriver.

Removing the chamber thermocouple


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Remove the upper electronics bay cover. See Removing the upper electronics bay cover on page 173
4. Remove the electronics bay. See Removing the electronics bay on
page 175
5. Push the strain relief clip out towards the front of the printer using a small
standard screwdriver. See Figure 300.
Figure 300: Strain relief clip location

Push the strain relief tab


towards the front of the
printer to remove.

6. Bend the tip of the thermocouple straight and slide out through the strain
relief clip.
7.

Remove the thermocouple.

Installing the chamber thermocouple


1.

Push the thermocouple through the mounting hole until it is 3/4 (19mm)
through the other side.

2. Push the strain relief in to lock the thermocouple in place.


3. Bend the thermocouple over to the left. See Figure 301.

-319

Figure 301: Bending the thermocouple

4. Reinstall the electronics bay. See Installing the electronics bay on


page 176
5. Reinstall the upper electronics bay cover. See Installing the upper electronics bay cover on page 174
6. Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
7.

-320

Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

Z Motor
Required Tools

16

nut driver or standard screwdriver.

32

allen wrench.

64

allen wrench.
Cutters

Hardware

Wire ties (x2)


10-32 x 38 slotted screws (x4)

4-40 x 14 slotted screws (x8)

#4 Splitlock washer (x4)

#4 SAE washer (x4)

Removing the Z motor


1.

Remove the top panel. SeeRemoving the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Remove the upper electronics bay cover. See Removing the upper electronics bay cover on page 173
4. Remove the electronics bay. See Removing the electronics bay on
page 175
5. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 4 Z stage
panel mounting screws and remove the Z stage panel. See Figure 302.

-321

Figure 302: Removing the Z stage panel

6. Remove the 4 Z motor energy chain mounting screws with a 332 allen
wrench. See Figure 303.
7.

Cut the tie wraps holding from around Z stage energy chain. See Figure
303.
Figure 303: Remove the Z motor energy chain

Remove the 2
mounting screws

Remove the 2
mounting screws

Cut the
wire tie

Cut the
wire tie

8. Loosen but do not remove the Z stage leadscrew mounting bracket set
screws using a 964 allen wrench. See Figure 304.

-322

Figure 304: Loosen Z stage leadscrew mounting bracket set screws

Loosen set screws on both


sides of the mounting
bracket.

9. Turn the leadscrew counter clockwise until it is free of the motor. See Figure 305.
Figure 305: Remove the leadscrew

10. Remove the 4 Z stage motor mounting screws with a 332 allen wrench
and remove the motor. See Figure 306.
Figure 306: Removing the Z stage motor

Remove the 4
mounting screws

-323

Installing the Z motor


1.

Place the Z motor in its mounting location and loosely fasten the
mounting screws with a 332 allen wrench.

2. Insert the leadscrew and turn clockwise until the leadscrew clears the
bottom of the motor.
3. Raise the Z stage to the upper limit and tighten the leadscrew mounting
bracket set screws.
4. Lower the Z stage down to its lower limit and tighten the Z stage motor
mounting screws.
5. Align the Z stage motor energy chain and fasten the mounting screws,
be sure not to overtighten and crush the energy chain.
6. Attach and tighten the wire ties on both ends of the Z motor wire.
Figure 307: Remove the Z motor energy chain
Reinstall the wire
tie

Reinstall the wire


tie

7.

Reinstall the Z stage panel and tighten the 4 mounting screws with a
5
16 nut driver or standard screwdriver.

8. Reinstall the electronics bay. See Installing the electronics bay on


page 176
9. Reinstall the upper electronics bay cover. See Installing the upper electronics bay cover on page 174
10. Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
11. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162

-324

Z Stage
The HP Designjet 3D printer has a Z stage pan that is 8 x 6 inches. The HP
Designjet Color 3D printer has a Z stage pan that is 8 x 8 inches. The
physical replacement is the same for both printers. When its time to calibrate
they will have different procedures.

Required Tools

16 nut driver or standard screwdriver.

16 socket driver or 516 box wrench.


3
32 allen wrench.

Head bracket, dial indicator and belt tension gauge assembly

Y rod spacer (x2)

Leveling wrench

64 allen wrench.
Cutters
Z Guide rod stand off (x2)

-325

Z Guide rod spacer (x2)

Head bracket, dial indicator and belt tension gauge assembly

Z guide rod alignment fixture

Hardware

10-32 x 12 slotted screws (x4)

Removing the Z stage


1.

Remove the top panel. See Removing the top panel on page 161

2. Remove the side panels. See Removing the side panels on page 162
3. Remove the electronics bay. See Removing the electronics bay on
page 175
4. Remove the Z motor. See Removing the Z motor on page 321
5. Tilt the printer forward 6 inches (152mm) and prop up with a material
carrier or something similar.

-326

6. Using a 516 socket driver or 516 box wrench, remove the 2 lower Z
stage guide rod mounting screws. See Figure 308.
Figure 308: Lower Z stage guide rod mounting screw locations

Remove the 2
mounting screws

7.

Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, remove the 2 upper Z


stage guide rod mounting screws. See Figure 309.
Figure 309: Upper Z stage guide rod mounting screw locations

Remove the 2
mounting screws

8. Remove the Z stage by pulling out of the printer through the chamber
door.
Installing the Z stage
1.

Align the Z stage guide rods with the upper and lower mounting holes.

2. Using a 516 socket driver or 516 box wrench, loosely fasten the lower
Z stage guide rod mounting screws.
3. Using a 5/6 nut driver or standard screwdriver, loosely fasten the
upper Z stage guide rod mounting screws.

-327

4. Using a 332 allen wrench, Reinstall the 4 Z motor energy chain mounting screws.
5. Move Z stage to the middle of travel.
6. Place one Z stage guide rod alignment fixture at the bottom of the Z
stage. See Figure 310.
7.

Place one Z stage guide rod alignment fixture at the top of the Z stage,
See Figure 310.
Figure 310: Z stage guide rod alignment fixture locations

Z Stage guide rod


alignment fixtures

8. Using a 516 socket driver or 516 box wrench, securely fasten the
lower Z stage guide rod mounting screws.
9. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, securely fasten the
upper Z stage guide rod mounting screws.
10. Remove the upper and lower Z stage guide rod alignment fixtures.
11. Using a 3/32 allen wrench, reinstall the Z motor. Do not tighten the
screws completely at this time.
12. Feed the Z stage leadscrew through the mounting brackets and through
the Z motor. Align the leadscrew with the set screws.
13. Using a 9/64 allen wrench, tighten the Z stage leadscrew mounting
bracket set screws.
14. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, loosen but do not
remove the upper and lower Z stage leadscrew mounting brackets. See
Figure 311.

-328

Figure 311: Z stage leadscrew mounting bracket locations

Z Stage
leadscrew
mounting
brackets

15. Raise the Z stage up all the way and insert the Z stage leadscrew alignment fixture at the bottom of the guide rods. See Figure 312.
16. Once the alignment fixture is in properly, turn the locking screws 1/4
turn counter clockwise to lock in place. See Figure 312.
Figure 312: Inserting the Z stage guide rod alignment fixture

17. Using a 516 socket driver or 516 box wrench, securely fasten the
lower Z stage leadscrew mounting bracket screws from the backside of
the printer.
18. Remove the Z stage leadscrew alignment fixture by pressing in the
screws and turning 14 turn clockwise to unlock.

-329

19. Lower the Z stage to the bottom.


20. Insert the Z stage leadscrew alignment fixture at the top of the guide
rods. See Figure 313.
21. Once the alignment fixture is in properly, turn the locking screws 14 turn
counter clockwise to lock in place. See Figure 313.
Figure 313: Inserting the Z stage leadscrew alignment fixture

22. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, securely fasten the
upper Z stage leadscrew mounting bracket screws.
23. Remove the Z stage leadscrew alignment fixture by pressing in the
screws and turning 1/4 turn clockwise to unlock.
24. Move the Z stage to its lower limit.
25. Using a 332 allen wrench, securely fasten the Z motor mounting screws.
26. Using a 516 nut driver or standard screwdriver, reinstall the Z stage
panel.
27. Slowly lift the Z stage to the top of its travel, making sure it has smooth
movement.
28. Let the Z stage travel to the lower limit on its own or with slight downward pressure, making sure it has smooth movement to the end of travel.
Note: If the Z stage is binding, loosen the Z stage motor mounting
screws and the Z stage leadscrew mounting bracket screws, then
repeat steps 10-24.

-330

29. Mark a location on each corner of the platen surface with a marker See
figure 314and figure 315. These marks will be used to reference the
same locations when leveling the table.
Figure 314: HP Designjet 3D (8in x 6in) Z stage table location points
BL (Back Left)

FL (Front Left)

BR (Back Right)

FR (Front Right)

Figure 315: HP Designjet Color 3D (8in x 8in) Z stage table location points
BL (Back Left)

FL (Front Left)

BR (Back Right)

FR (Front Right)

30. Attach a dial indicator to the head bracket.


31. Attached the head bracket to the toggle head assembly.
32. Move the dial indicator to the back left (BL) corner over the marked location.

-331

33. Raise the Z Stage until it contacts the dial indicator. Continue to raise the
Z stage approximately two additional revolutions of the dial indicator.
Wedge a screw driver or similar object between the underside of the
table and the bottom of the chamber to prevent the Z stage from moving
downward.
34. Move the dial indicator to the back left (BL) corner and zero the dial
indicator.
35. Move the dial indicator to the front left (FL) corner and write down the
value.
36. Move the dial indicator to the front right (FR) corner and write down the
value.
37. Move the dial indicator to the back right (BR) corner and write down the
value.
38. Enter the values that are written down into the XY level worksheet. Use
the 8x6 worksheet for HP Designjet 3D, see Figure 316. Use the 8x8
worksheet for HP Designjet Color 3D, see Figure 317.

-332

Figure 316: HP Designjet 3D measurement points and worksheet

BL

BR

FL

FR

-333

Figure 317: HP Designjet Color 3D measurement points and worksheet

BL

BR

FL

FR

-334

39. Move the dial indicator to the front left of the Z stage and zero the dial
indicator.
40. Using the XY guide rod leveling fixture, adjust the rod up or down until
the dial indicator reads the value the calculator has given. See Figure
274.
Figure 318: XY guide rod leveling fixture

41. Using a 532 allen wrench, securely fasten the front left Y guide rod
mounting screw.
42. Move the dial indicator to the front right of the Z stage and zero the dial
indicator.
43. Using the XY guide rod leveling fixture, adjust the rod up or down until
the dial indicator reads the value the calculator has given.
44. Using a 532 allen wrench, securely fasten the front right Y guide rod
mounting screw.
45. Move the dial indicator to the rear right of the Z stage and zero the dial
indicator.
46. Using the XY guide rod leveling fixture, adjust the rod up or down until
the dial indicator reads the value the calculator has given.
47. Using a 532 allen wrench, securely fasten the rear right Y guide rod
mounting screw.
48. Repeat steps 53- 66 until the XY table is completely level.
49. Remove the XY guide rod alignment brackets.
50. Remove the XY table leveling bracket and dial indicator.
51. Reinstall the electronics bay. See Installing the electronics bay on
page 176
52. Reinstall the side panels. See Installing the side panels on page 164
53. Reinstall the top panel. See Installing the top panel on page 162
54. Power the printer up.
55. From the display panel, press Maintenance > Machine > Tips.
56. Press Z Calibration to run the automated Z calibration process.

-335

-336

Service Calibrations
& Adjustments
This section guides you through various calibration and adjustment
procedures. For HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software instructions, see HP
Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software Help on page424.
Offset Calibrations ..................................................................... page 338
Adjusting Z Calibration and XY Tip Offset ............................... page 338
Z Calibration ....................................................................... page 338
XY Tip Calibration ................................................................ page 340
Part Based Calibration ............................................................... page 343
When to Perform Part Based calibration .................................. page 343
Performing part based calibration for HP Designjet 3D from the Service Calibration menu (Firmware version 9.1 or newer) ........................ page 343
Performing part based calibration for HP Designjet 3D with the HP Designjet
3D Diagnostic Software......................................................... page 352
Performing part based calibration for HP Designjet Color 3D from the Service
Calibration menu (Firmware version 9.1 or newer) ................... page 360
Performing part based calibration for HP Designjet Color 3D with the HP
Designjet Diagnostics Software............................................... page 371
Tensioning the X & Y Drive Belts ................................................. page 381
Zero the Dial Indicator .......................................................... page 381
Checking/Adjusting the X-Drive Belt Tension ............................ page 382
Checking/Adjusting the Y-Drive Belt Tension ............................ page 384
Get/Send Calibration Files ......................................................... page 386
Get Calibration .................................................................... page 386
Send Calibration .................................................................. page 386
XY Table Leveling....................................................................... page 386
Parts and Tools Required ....................................................... page 386
Adjusting the XY Table Level .................................................. page 390
Head Alignment Procedure......................................................... page 392

-337

Offset Calibrations
Adjusting Z Calibration and XY Tip Offset
Z calibration is needed to adjust the slight differences in tip heights. XY Tip
Offset is required to correct for the slight differences in tip alignment. Failure
to perform these calibrations will result in poor part quality and possible
LOEs.
Z and Tip Offset calibrations are mandatory whenever the tips are
replaced. If Tip Replacement is chosen from the Interface Panel
Maintenance>Machine>Tip>Replace, you will be prompted to perform the
calibrations as a part of the replacement procedure.
These calibrations can also be run without performing a Tip Replacement.
From Idle, choose Maintenance>Machine>Tip then Calibrate Z or Calibrate
XY.
CAUTION: Do not use the Z calibration or XY tip offset from the
test parts menu to calibrate the system.
Z Calibration
1.

Press Maintenance.

2. Press Machine.
3. Press Tip.
4. Press Calibrate Z.
5. Press Start Part. The printer will automatically build a Z Calibration part
(one square of model and one of support). The system will then measure
and calibrate the Z Axis for tip depth and tip level. (Build time is approximately 5 minutes).
6. Repeat steps 1-5 to verify proper calibration.
NOTE: Unusual circumstances may require that the Z calibration
values be entered manually. To change these values, see Entering
Z Calibration values manually (Firmware version 9.1 or newer) on
page338.
Entering Z Calibration values manually (Firmware version 9.1 or newer)
Z tip to base (ZT2B)
ZT2B is the Z distance from the support tip to the Z substrate sensor
activation point. If unable to calibrate automatically, this value may need to
be set to default in order to proceed with automatic calibration. The default
value is -0.0700.
1.

While the printer is at Idle, enter standby mode by pressing the


Standby... button.

2. Enter the Service Calibration menu by pressing the following button


sequence on the display panel: 3,2,3,3,1. See Figure 319.

-338

Figure 319: Service Calibration button sequence

Button 0
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3

3. Press the Edit Configuration button.


4. Press the Next... button.
5. Press the Next... button.
6. Press the ZT2B (Z tip to base) button.
7.

Enter the calibration value by pressing the Increment, Decrement and


Next Digit buttons.
NOTE: The value for ZT2B must be between -0.1500 and
0.0000.

8. When finished, press Done...


9. Press the Save and reboot button.
10. The printer will reboot and return to idle.
11. Perform automatic Z calibration. See Z Calibration on page338.
Z tip to tip (ZT2T)
ZT2T is the Z distance from the model tip to the support tip. A positive ZT2T
means the support tip is higher than the model tip. If a support layer on top
of model is too thick, add 0.010 to the ZT2T. If a model layer does not
stick to supports, subtract 0.010 from the ZT2T. If unable to calibrate
automatically, this value may need to be set to default in order to proceed
with automatic calibration. The default value is 0.0000.
1.

While the printer is at Idle, enter standby mode by pressing the


Standby... button.

2. Enter the Service Calibration menu by pressing the following button


sequence on the display panel: 3,2,3,3,1. See Figure 319.
3. Press the Edit Configuration button.

-339

4. Press the Next... button.


5. Press the Next... button.
6. Press the ZT2T (Z tip to tip) button.
7.

Enter the calibration value by pressing the Increment, Decrement and


Next Digit buttons.
NOTE: The value for ZT2T must be between -0.0500 and
0.0500.

8. When finished, press Done...


9. Press the Next... button until you reach the last page.
10. Press the Done... button.
11. Press the Save and reboot button.
12. The printer will reboot and return to idle.
13. Perform automatic Z calibration. See Z Calibration on page338.
XY Tip Calibration
1.

Press Maintenance.

2. Press Machine.
3. Press Tip.
4. Press Calibrate XY.
5. Press Start Part. The printer will automatically build an XY Tip Calibration part. (Build time is approximately 10 minutes).
6. When the XY Tip Calibration part is complete the printer will display
Remove Part and Select XY Adjustment - X:0, Y:0
7.

Remove the XY Tip Calibration part from the printer.

8. Inspect the part and calibrate the X and Y axes as follows (See Figure
320).
A. Use the magnifier from the Startup Kit to view the support
road.
B. Identify the location on the +X or X side of the part where
the support road is best centered within the model
boundaries.
C. Read the number closest to this location. This is the
required X Tip Offset adjustment, in mils. If the number is
on the -X side, a negative offset is required.
D. Select Increment or Decrement to input the X offset
adjustment - the value will change in the upper display
window (by default, the printer will be ready to accept the
X value).
E.

Once you have entered the X offset value, Select Y and


repeat the procedure for Y Offset value.

9. Select Done after you have input the X and Y tip offsets. The printer will
return to Maintenance.
10. Repeat steps 1-9 to verify proper calibration.

-340

Figure 320: Example XY Tip Calibration Part.


This example requires an adjustment of X = + 2 mils, Y = - 4 mils

NOTE: Unusual circumstances may require that the XY Tip


Calibration values be entered manually. To change these values,
see Entering XY Tip Calibration values manually (Firmware version
9.1 or newer) on page341.
Entering XY Tip Calibration values manually (Firmware version 9.1 or newer)
XY Tip is the XY distance from model tip to the support tip. To move support
roads to the right (+X), apply a positive offset. To move support roads to
the back (+Y), apply a positive offset. If the calibration model is too far off
to read, these values may be set to default as a starting point for
calibration. The default values are X: 0.780 and Y: 0.000.
1.

While the printer is at Idle, enter standby mode by pressing the


Standby... button.

2. Enter the Service Calibration menu by pressing the following button


sequence on the display panel: 3,2,3,3,1. See Figure 321.

-341

Figure 321: Service Calibration button sequence

Button 0
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3

3. Press the Edit Configuration button.


4. Press the Next... button.
5. Press the Next... button.
6. Press the XTIP (X tip offset) button.
7.

Enter the calibration value by pressing the Increment, Decrement and


Next Digit buttons.
NOTE: The value for XTIP must be between 0.7300 and 0.8300,
For example, the value from Figure 320 is + 2, you would increment
the current value by +0.002.

8. When finished, press Done...


9. Press the YTIP (Y tip offset) button.
10. Enter the calibration value by pressing the Increment, Decrement and
Next Digit buttons.
NOTE: The value for YTIP must be between -0.0500 and 0.0500,
For example, the value from Figure 320 is - 4, you would decrement
the current value by -0.004.
11. When finished, press Done...
12. Press the Next... button until you reach the last page.
13. Press the Done... button.
14. Press the Save and reboot button.
15. The printer will reboot and return to idle.
16. Perform automatic XY Tip Calibration, see XY Tip Calibration on
page340.

-342

Part Based Calibration


Required Tools

Set of basic service tools


6 digital calipers
HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software CD (Printer firmware versions
older than 9.1)

Part based calibration consists of building a part and then taking six
measurements - front, right, left, rear, left rear and left front. These
measurements are then entered using HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software.
When to Perform Part Based calibration
Part Based calibration needs to be performed after replacing the XY table
assembly. Part Based calibration is performed to eliminate any skewing in
the X and Y axes.
Performing part based calibration for HP Designjet 3D from the Service
Calibration menu (Firmware version 9.1 or newer)
1.

While the printer is at Idle, enter standby mode by pressing the


Standby... button.

2. Enter the Service Calibration menu by pressing the following button


sequence on the display panel: 3,2,3,3,1. See Figure 322.
Figure 322: Service Calibration button sequence

Button 0
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3

3. Press the Reset Part Based Calibration button.


4. The printer will ask Do you want to zero settings and reboot? Press
Yes.
5. Reboot the printer.

-343

6. Once the system displays Idle, press Maintenance>System>Test Parts


then select the test_XY_cal part.
7.

When part is completed, remove from printer and let cool for five minutes.

8. Locate the filled circle, this indicates the front of the substrate, see Figure
323
Figure 323: Locating the Filled Circle (B)

9. Using a digital caliper, measure and record the diameter of circle B


along the center line between A and C, see Figure 324
NOTE: Reference letters are not actually printed on the part. If
needed, use the Part Measurement Equations sheet to record the
values. See Part Measurement Equations on page359.
Figure 324: Measuring diameter of B

10. Next measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circle A
and B, see Figure 325 Ensure that the caliper is not seated on the small
bump of circle A.

-344

Figure 325: Measuring distance from outside edges of A and B

11. Next measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circle B
and C, see Figure 326 Ensure that the caliper is not seated on the small
bump of circle C.
Figure 326: Measuring distance from outside edges of B and C

12. Add the lengths derived from steps 10 and 11 (A-B and B-C) and then
subtract the width of circle B. Record this total as GFront
13. Measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circles E and
F. Ensure the caliper is not seated on the small bump of circle E. See Figure 327
Figure 327: Measuring distances from outside edges of E and F

14. Measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circles F and
G. Ensure the caliper is not seated on the small bump of circle G. See
Figure 328

-345

Figure 328: Measuring distances from outside edges of F and G

15. Measure and record the diameter of circle F along the center line
between E and G. See Figure 329
Figure 329: Measuring diameter of circle F

16. Add the lengths derived from steps 14 and 15 (E-F and F-G) and then
subtract the width of circle F derived from step 16. Record this total as
GRear
17. Measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circles C
and G. Ensure the caliper is not seated on the small bump of circles C or
G. Record this total as GRight, see Figure 330

-346

Figure 330: Measuring distances from outside edges of C and G

18. Measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circles A
and E. Ensure the caliper is not seated on the small bump of circles A or
E. Record this total as GLeft, see Figure 331
Figure 331: Measuring distances from outside edges of A and E

19. Measure and record the distance from the outside edge of the small
bump on circle C to the outside edge of circle D. See Figure 332

-347

Figure 332: Measuring distances from outside edges of C and D

20. Measure and record the distance from the outside edge of the small
bump on circle E to the outside edge of circle D. See Figure 333
Figure 333: Measuring distances from outside edges of D and E

21. Measure and record the diameter of circle D along the center line
between C and E. See Figure 334

-348

Figure 334: Measuring diameter of circle D

22. Add the lengths derived from steps 20 and 21 (C-D and D-E) and then
subtract the width of circle D derived from step 22. Record this total as
GLR
23. Measure and record the distance from the outside edge of the small
bump on circle A to the outside edge of circle D. See Figure 335
Figure 335: Measuring distances from outside edges of A and D

24. Measure and record the distance from the outside edge of the small
bump on circle G to the outside edge of circle D. See Figure 336

-349

Figure 336: Measuring distances from outside edges of D and G

25. Measure and record the diameter of circle D along the center line
between A and G. See Figure 337
Figure 337: Measuring diameter of circle D

26. Add the lengths derived from steps 24 and 25 (A-D and D-G) and then
subtract the width of circle D derived from step 26. Record this total as
GLF
27. Enter the Service Calibration menu by pressing the following button
sequence on the display panel: 3,2,3,3,1. See Figure 322.
28. Press the Edit Configuration button.
29. Press the GLeft button. Enter the value recorded from step 18 by pressing the Increment, Decrement and Next Digit buttons.
NOTE: The value for GLeft must be between 5.250 and 5.750.
30. When finished, press Done...

-350

31. Press the GRight button. Enter the value recorded from step 17 by pressing the Increment, Decrement and Next Digit buttons.
NOTE: The value for GRight must be between 5.250 and 5.750.
32. When finished, press Done...
33. Press the GFront button. Enter the value recorded from step 12 by pressing the Increment, Decrement and Next Digit buttons.
NOTE: The value for GFront must be between 7.250 and 7.750.
34. When finished, press Done...
35. Press the Next... button.
36. Press the GRear button. Enter the value recorded from step 16 by pressing the Increment, Decrement and Next Digit buttons.
NOTE: The value for GRear must be between 7.250 and 7.750.
37. When finished, press Done...
38. Press the GLF button. Enter the value recorded from step 26 by pressing
the Increment, Decrement and Next Digit buttons.
NOTE: The value for GLF must be between 9.051 and 9.551.
39. When finished, press Done...
40. Press the GLR button. Enter the value recorded from step 22 by pressing
the Increment, Decrement and Next Digit buttons.
NOTE: The value for GLR must be between 9.051 and 9.551.
41. When finished, press Done...
42. Press the Next... button until you reach the last page.
43. Press the Done... button.
44. Press the Save and reboot button.
45. The printer will reboot and return to idle.
46. Build a sample part to verify proper operation.

-351

Performing part based calibration for HP Designjet 3D with the HP Designjet


3D Diagnostic Software
1.

Open HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software and select the current


modeler from the pull down menu.

2. Open Gantry Calibration Dialog box in HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic


Software
3. Set the X adjust value to 0.
4. In the Part Calibration section, there are six boxes: LEFT, RIGHT, FRONT,
REAR, LEFT FRONT and LEFT REAR. Set these values to 0.
5. Click on the green check mark to save the values.
6. Toggle the system power down switch.
7.

Once the system displays Idle, press Maintenance>System>Test Parts


then select the test_XY_cal part.

8. When part is completed, remove from printer and let cool for five minutes.
9. Locate the filled circle, this indicates the front of the substrate, see Figure
338
Figure 338: Locating the Filled Circle (B)

10. Using a digital caliper, measure and record the diameter of circle B
along the center line between A and C, see Figure 339
NOTE: Reference letters are not actually printed on the part. If
needed, use the Part Measurement Equations sheet to record the
values. See Part Measurement Equations on page359.

-352

Figure 339: Measuring diameter of B

11. Next measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circle A
and B, see Figure 340 Ensure that the caliper is not seated on the small
bump of circle A.
Figure 340: Measuring distance from outside edges of A and B

12. Next measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circle B
and C, see Figure 341 Ensure that the caliper is not seated on the small
bump of circle C.
Figure 341: Measuring distance from outside edges of B and C

13. Add the lengths derived from steps 5 and 6 (A-B and B-C) and then subtract the width of circle B. Record this total as Front
14. Measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circles E and
F. Ensure the caliper is not seated on the small bump of circle E. See Figure 342

-353

Figure 342: Measuring distances from outside edges of E and F

15. Measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circles F and
G. Ensure the caliper is not seated on the small bump of circle G. See
Figure 343
Figure 343: Measuring distances from outside edges of F and G

16. Measure and record the diameter of circle F along the center line
between E and G. See Figure 344
Figure 344: Measuring diameter of circle F

17. Add the lengths derived from steps 14 and 15 (E-F and F-G) and then
subtract the width of circle F derived from step 16. Record this total as
Rear
18. Measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circles C
and G. Ensure the caliper is not seated on the small bump of circles C or
G. Record this total as Right, see Figure 345

-354

Figure 345: Measuring distances from outside edges of C and G

19. Measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circles A
and E. Ensure the caliper is not seated on the small bump of circles A or
E. Record this total as Left, see Figure 346
Figure 346: Measuring distances from outside edges of A and E

20. Measure and record the distance from the outside edge of the small
bump on circle C to the outside edge of circle D. See Figure 347

-355

Figure 347: Measuring distances from outside edges of C and D

21. Measure and record the distance from the outside edge of the small
bump on circle E to the outside edge of circle D. See Figure 348
Figure 348: Measuring distances from outside edges of D and E

22. Measure and record the diameter of circle D along the center line
between C and E. See Figure 349

-356

Figure 349: Measuring diameter of circle D

23. Add the lengths derived from steps 20 and 21 (C-D and D-E) and then
subtract the width of circle D derived from step 22. Record this total as
Left Rear
24. Measure and record the distance from the outside edge of the small
bump on circle A to the outside edge of circle D. See Figure 350
Figure 350: Measuring distances from outside edges of A and D

25. Measure and record the distance from the outside edge of the small
bump on circle G to the outside edge of circle D. See Figure 351

-357

Figure 351: Measuring distances from outside edges of D and G

26. Measure and record the diameter of circle D along the center line
between A and G. See Figure 352
Figure 352: Measuring diameter of circle D

27. Add the lengths derived from steps 24 and 25 (A-D and D-G) and then
subtract the width of circle D derived from step 26. Record this total as
Left Front
28. Open HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software and select the Current Modeler from the pull down menu.
29. Open the Open Gantry Calibration Dialog box in HP Designjet 3D
Diagnostic Software.
30. In the Part Calibration section, there are six boxes: LEFT, RIGHT, FRONT,
REAR, LEFT FRONT and LEFT REAR. Enter the measurements in the
appropriate box.
31. Once the values have been entered, click on the green check mark.
32. Toggle the system power switch to accept the new values.
33. Run a test part to verify system is operating correctly.

-358

Part Measurement Equations


Use the equation table below to record part measurements. Refer to these
equations when entering values in HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software.
Front: _______ + ______ - ____ = ________
(A + B) + (B + C) - B
Right: _______ + ______ - ____ = ________
(C + F) + (F +I) - F
Left: _______ + ______ - ____ = ________
(A + D) + (D + G) - D
Rear: _______ + ______ - ____ = ________
(G + H) + (H + I) - H
Left Rear: _______ + ______ - ____ = ________
(C + E) + (E + G) - E
Left Front: _______ + ______ - ____ = _______
(A + E) + (E + I) - E
Figure 353: Part based calibration measurement locations

-359

Performing part based calibration for HP Designjet Color 3D from the


Service Calibration menu (Firmware version 9.1 or newer)
1.

While the printer is at Idle, enter standby mode by pressing the


Standby... button.

2. Enter the Service Calibration menu by pressing the following button


sequence on the display panel: 3,2,3,3,1. See Figure 354.
Figure 354: Service Calibration button sequence

Button 0
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3

3. Press the Reset Part Based Calibration button.


4. The printer will ask Do you want to zero settings and reboot? Press
Yes.
5. Reboot the printer.
6. Once the system displays Idle, press Maintenance>System>Test Parts
then select the test_XY_cal part.
7.

When part is completed, remove from printer and let cool for five minutes.

8. Locate the filled circle, this indicates the front of the substrate, see Figure
355

-360

Figure 355: Locating the Filled Circle (B)

9. Using a digital caliper, measure and record the diameter of circle B


along the center line between A and C. See Figure 356
NOTE: Reference letters are not actually printed on the part. If
needed, use the Part Measurement Equations sheet to record the
values. See Part Measurement Equations on page380.
Figure 356: Measuring diameter of B

10. Next measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circle A
and B, see Figure 357 Ensure that the caliper is not seated on the small
bump of circle A.

-361

Figure 357: Measuring distance from outside edges of A and B

11. Next measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circle B
and C, see Figure 358 Ensure that the caliper is not seated on the small
bump of circle C.
Figure 358: Measuring distance from outside edges of B and C

12. Add the lengths derived from steps 5 and 6 (A-B and B-C) and then subtract the width of circle B. Record this total as GFront
13. Measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circles E and
F. Ensure the caliper is not seated on the small bump of circle E. See Figure 378
Figure 359: Measuring distances from outside edges of C and F

-362

14. Measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circles F and
I. See Figure 379
Figure 360: Measuring distances from outside edges of F and G

15. Measure and record the diameter of circle F along the center line
between C and I. See Figure 380

-363

Figure 361: Measuring diameter of circle F

16. Add the lengths derived from steps 14 and 15 (C-F and F-I) and then subtract the width of circle F derived from step 16. Record this total as
GRight
17. Measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circles A
and D. See Figure 381
Figure 362: Measuring distances from outside edges of A and D

18. Measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circles D
and G. See Figure 382

-364

Figure 363: Measuring distances from outside edges of D and G

19. Measure and record the diameter of circle D along the center line
between A and G. See Figure 383
Figure 364: Measuring diameter of circle D

20. Add the lengths derived from steps 18 and 19 (A-D and D-G) and then
subtract the width of circle D derived from step 20. Record this total as
GLeft
21. Measure and record the distance from the outside edge of circle G to
the outside edge of circle H. See Figure 384
Figure 365: Measuring distances from outside edges of G and H

-365

22. Measure and record the distance from the outside edge of circle H to the
outside edge of circle I. See Figure 385
Figure 366: Measuring distances from outside edges of H and I

23. Measure and record the diameter of circle H along the center line
between G and I. See Figure 386
Figure 367: Measuring diameter of circle H

24. Add the lengths derived from steps 22 and 23 (G-H and H-I) and then
subtract the width of circle H derived from step 24. Record this total as
GRear
25. Measure and record the distance from the outside edge of circle C to the
outside edge of circle E. See Figure 387

-366

Figure 368: Measuring distances from outside edges of C and E

26. Measure and record the distance from the outside edge of circle E to the
outside edge of circle G. See Figure 388
Figure 369: Measuring distances from outside edges of E and G

27. Measure and record the diameter of circle E along the center line
between C and G. See Figure 389

-367

Figure 370: Measuring diameter of circle E

28. Add the lengths derived from steps 26 and 27 (C-E and E-G) and then
subtract the width of circle E derived from step 28. Record this total as
GLR
29. Measure and record the distance from the outside edge of circle A to the
outside edge of circle E. See Figure 390
Figure 371: Measuring distances from outside edges of A and E

30. Measure and record the distance from the outside edge of circle E to the
outside edge of circle I. See Figure 391

-368

Figure 372: Measuring distances from outside edges of E and I

31. Measure and record the diameter of circle E along the center line
between A and I. See Figure 392
Figure 373: Measuring diameter of circle E

32. Add the lengths derived from steps 30 and 31 (A-E and E-I) and then
subtract the width of circle E derived from step 32. Record this total as
GLF
33. Enter the Service Calibration menu by pressing the following button
sequence on the display panel: 3,2,3,3,1. See Figure 354.
34. Press the Edit Configuration button.
35. Press the GLeft button. Enter the value recorded from step 18 by pressing the Increment, Decrement and Next Digit buttons.
NOTE: The value for GLeft must be between 5.250 and 5.750.
36. When finished, press Done...

-369

37. Press the GRight button. Enter the value recorded from step 17 by pressing the Increment, Decrement and Next Digit buttons.
NOTE: The value for GRight must be between 5.250 and 5.750.
38. When finished, press Done...
39. Press the GFront button. Enter the value recorded from step 12 by pressing the Increment, Decrement and Next Digit buttons.
NOTE: The value for GFront must be between 7.250 and 7.750.
40. When finished, press Done...
41. Press the Next... button.
42. Press the GRear button. Enter the value recorded from step 16 by pressing the Increment, Decrement and Next Digit buttons.
NOTE: The value for GRear must be between 7.250 and 7.750.
43. When finished, press Done...
44. Press the GLF button. Enter the value recorded from step 26 by pressing
the Increment, Decrement and Next Digit buttons.
NOTE: The value for GLF must be between 10.357 and 10.857.
45. When finished, press Done...
46. Press the GLR button. Enter the value recorded from step 22 by pressing
the Increment, Decrement and Next Digit buttons.
NOTE: The value for GLR must be between 10.357 and 10.857.
47. When finished, press Done...
48. Press the Next... button until you reach the last page.
49. Press the Done... button.
50. Press the Save and reboot button.
51. The printer will reboot and return to idle.
52. Build a sample part to verify proper operation.

-370

Performing part based calibration for HP Designjet Color 3D with the HP


Designjet Diagnostics Software
1.

Open HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software and select the current


modeler from the pull down menu.

2. Open Gantry Calibration Dialog box in HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic


Software
3. Set the X adjust value to 0.
4. In the Part Calibration section, there are six boxes: LEFT, RIGHT, FRONT,
REAR, LEFT FRONT and LEFT REAR. Set these values to 0.
5. Click on the green check mark to save the values.
6. Toggle the system power down switch.
7.

Once the system displays Idle, press Maintenance>System>Test Parts


then select the test_XY_cal part.

8. When part is completed, remove from printer and let cool for five minutes.
9. Locate the filled circle, this indicates the front of the substrate, see Figure
374
Figure 374: Locating the Filled Circle (B)

10. Using a digital caliper, measure and record the diameter of circle B
along the center line between A and C, see Figure 375
NOTE: Reference letters are not actually printed on the part. If
needed, use the Part Measurement Equations sheet to record the
values. See Part Measurement Equations on page380.

-371

Figure 375: Measuring diameter of B

11. Next measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circle A
and B, see Figure 376
Figure 376: Measuring distance from outside edges of A and B

12. Next measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circle B
and C, see Figure 377
Figure 377: Measuring distance from outside edges of B and C

13. Add the lengths derived from steps 11 and 12 (A-B and B-C) and then
subtract the width of circle B. Record this total as Front
14. Measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circles C
and F. Ensure the caliper is not seated on the small bump of circle C.
See Figure 378

-372

Figure 378: Measuring distances from outside edges of C and F

15. Measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circles F and
I. See Figure 379
Figure 379: Measuring distances from outside edges of F and I

16. Measure and record the diameter of circle F along the center line
between C and I. See Figure 380

-373

Figure 380: Measuring diameter of circle F

17. Add the lengths derived from steps 14 and 15 (C-F and F-I) and then subtract the width of circle F derived from step 16. Record this total as
Right
18. Measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circles A
and D. See Figure 381
Figure 381: Measuring distances from outside edges of A and D

19. Measure and record the distance from the outside edges of circles D
and G. See Figure 382

-374

Figure 382: Measuring distances from outside edges of D and G

20. Measure and record the diameter of circle D along the center line
between A and G. See Figure 383
Figure 383: Measuring diameter of circle D

21. Add the lengths derived from steps 18 and 19 (A-D and D-G) and then
subtract the width of circle D derived from step 20. Record this total as
Left
22. Measure and record the distance from the outside edge of circle G to
the outside edge of circle H. See Figure 384
Figure 384: Measuring distances from outside edges of G and H

-375

23. Measure and record the distance from the outside edge of circle H to the
outside edge of circle I. See Figure 385
Figure 385: Measuring distances from outside edges of H and I

24. Measure and record the diameter of circle H along the center line
between G and I. See Figure 386
Figure 386: Measuring diameter of circle H

25. Add the lengths derived from steps 22 and 23 (G-H and H-I) and then
subtract the width of circle H derived from step 24. Record this total as
Rear
26. Measure and record the distance from the outside edge of circle C to the
outside edge of circle E. See Figure 387

-376

Figure 387: Measuring distances from outside edges of C and E

27. Measure and record the distance from the outside edge of circle E to the
outside edge of circle G. See Figure 388
Figure 388: Measuring distances from outside edges of E and G

28. Measure and record the diameter of circle E along the center line
between C and G. See Figure 389

-377

Figure 389: Measuring diameter of circle E

29. Add the lengths derived from steps 26 and 27 (C-E and E-G) and then
subtract the width of circle E derived from step 28. Record this total as
Left Rear
30. Measure and record the distance from the outside edge of circle A to the
outside edge of circle E. See Figure 390
Figure 390: Measuring distances from outside edges of A and E

31. Measure and record the distance from the outside edge of circle E to the
outside edge of circle I. See Figure 391

-378

Figure 391: Measuring distances from outside edges of E and I

32. Measure and record the diameter of circle E along the center line
between A and I. See Figure 392
Figure 392: Measuring diameter of circle E

33. Add the lengths derived from steps 30 and 31 (A-E and E-I) and then
subtract the width of circle E derived from step 32. Record this total as
Left Front
34. Open HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software and select the Current Modeler from the pull down menu.
35. Open the Open Gantry Calibration Dialog box in HP Designjet 3D
Diagnostic Software.
36. In the Part Calibration section, there are six boxes: LEFT, RIGHT, FRONT,
REAR, LEFT FRONT and LEFT REAR. Enter the measurements in the
appropriate box.
37. Once the values have been entered, click on the green check mark.
38. Toggle the system power switch to accept the new values.
39. Run a test part to verify system is operating correctly.

-379

Part Measurement Equations


Use the equation table below to record part measurements. Refer to these
equations when entering values in HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software.
Front: _______ + ______ - ____ = ________
(A + B) + (B + C) - B
Right: _______ + ______ - ____ = ________
(C + F) + (F +I) - F
Left: _______ + ______ - ____ = ________
(A + D) + (D + G) - D
Rear: _______ + ______ - ____ = ________
(G + H) + (H + I) - H
Left Rear: _______ + ______ - ____ = ________
(C + E) + (E + G) - E
Left Front: _______ + ______ - ____ = _______
(A + E) + (E + I) - E
Figure 393: Part based calibration measurement locations

-380

Tensioning the X & Y Drive Belts


CAUTION: The X & Y Drive Belt Tension must be checked and
adjusted with the system and belts at room temperature
(approximately 20 minutes to cool to room temperature).
Zero the Dial Indicator
1.

Insert the zero gauge block into the gauge. See Figure 394

2. Loosen the adjustment screw and slide the dial indicator assembly up or
down to set the zero reading: The large hand should be on 0 and the
small hand on 5.
3. Tighten the adjustment screw (do not over tighten the screw) and recheck
the reading. Reading should be same as step 2.
4. Remove the zero block gauge block from the fixture.
Figure 394: Tension gauge zero setting

Adjustment screw

Zero gauge block

-381

Checking/Adjusting the X-Drive Belt Tension


1.

Remove the top and side panels.

2. If required, allow system to cool to room temperature (approximately 20


minutes).
3. Move the Head Assembly to the full right travel position within the build
envelope (as viewed from the front of the printer).
4. Position the dial indicator on the rear section of the X-Drive belt - centered between the Head Assembly and the left side of the build envelope. (Figure 395)
Figure 395: X belt tension location

5. Check the tension: (Figure 396)


The large hand on the gauge should read between 25 and 35 mils, and
the small hand should read between 4 and 5.

-382

Figure 396: Gauge reading at correct X belt tension (Shading indicates


acceptable range)

6. If the tension is out of the range specified above, adjust the belt tension
by turning the X belt tensioning nut on the X-Drive Idler/Tension Adjust
gear. (Figure 397)
Figure 397: X-Drive Belt Tension Adjustment

X belt tension
bolt

7.

Remove the belt fixture and run the head back and forth several times.

8. Continue to adjust and check the tension until the tension meets specification.
9. Reinstall side and top panels.

-383

Checking/Adjusting the Y-Drive Belt Tension


NOTE: The Y-Drive system consists of two drive belts - one on each
side of the build envelope. Each belt must be checked, adjusted
and of equal values.
1.

Remove the top, side and side access panels.

2. If required, allow system to cool to room temperature (approximately 20


minutes).
3. Move the Head Assembly to full rear travel within the build envelope
4. Position the dial indicator on the top section of the Y-Drive belt at the
center point of the belt. (Figure 398)
Figure 398: Y-Drive Belt Tension Check

Y-Drive Belt clamp (one on each side).

Dial Indicator position for Y-Drive belt tension check.

5. The large hand on the gauge should read between 0 and 30 mils and
the small hand should read between 4 and 5 (Figure 399).

-384

Figure 399: Gauge readings

Service Limit

Adjustment Limit

6. If the tension is not within specification, remove the front panel to gain
access to the tensioning nuts.
7.

Next loosen, but do not remove, the 4 Y-Drive Belt clamp screws. Check
that the belt is clear of the clamp before adjusting the tension. Note:
There is one clamp per Y belt. (Figure 398)

8. Locate the Y belt tension adjustment nut on the front of the system. (Figure 400)
9. Adjust (increase/decrease) the tension by turning the tensioning nut (Figure 400) so that the dial indicator reads between 25 and 35.
Figure 400: Y drive belt tension adjustment

Y-Drive Belt
Tension
Adjusting
Nut

10. Remove the belt fixture and move the head forward and back across the
gantry several times.
11. Reattach the belt tension gauge and recheck the tension.
12. Continue to adjust and check the tension until the tension meets specification.
13. Tighten the 4 Y-Drive Belt clamp screws. (One clamp per Y belt).
14. Reinstall the top, front and side panels.

-385

Get/Send Calibration Files


The .cal file contains the calibration values for the system. If the hard drive is
replaced the .cal file will be automatically downloaded from the frame ID
chip.
Situations where the printer will not calibrate before a build, even if manual
calibration has been performed by the technician, the factory .cal file may
need to be obtained from Stratasys, Inc.

Get Calibration
The Get Calibration button allows a single calibration file to be retrieved
from any printer. This calibration file will also be on the printer Frame ID
chip. This file contains all the factory calibration information, including, but
not limited to: Tip Offset, Tip Depth, Y Lash, X Correction, and the table
calibration .DAT file.
When the button is pressed, a file selection dialog is presented allowing the
assignment of a file name and the selection of a storage location. This file
should be updated any time maintenance is performed that affects the
factory calibration.

Send Calibration
The Send Calibration button allows you to send the complete set of factory
calibrations to the printer as a single file. This includes but is not limited to:
Tip Offset, Tip Depth, YLash, X Correction, and the gantry DAT file. This file
is stored on the system frame ID chip. A calibration file can be retrieved from
the modeler using Get Calibration.
When this button is pressed a dialog box appears that allows you to browse
for and select the calibration file to send to the printer.

XY Table Leveling
Parts and Tools Required

Dial indicator
Head bracket
Basic tool set
Table leveling adjustment tool

Checking the XY Table Level


1.

Remove the substrate from the Z Stage table.

2. Mark a location on each corner of the platen surface with a marker, see
Figure 401 These marks will be used to reference the same locations
when leveling the table.

-386

Figure 401: Z stage table location points


BL (Back Left)

BR (Back Right)

FL (Front Left)

FR (Front Right)

3. Attach a dial indicator to the head bracket.


4. Attached the head to the toggle head assembly.
5. Move the dial indicator to the back left (BL) corner over the marked location.
6. Raise the Z Stage until it contacts the dial indicator. Continue to raise the
Z stage approximately two additional revolutions of the dial indicator.
Wedge a screw driver or similar object between the underside of the
table and the bottom of the chamber to prevent the Z stage from moving
downward.
7.

Zero the dial indicator (this is the reference position and will always be
zero).

8. Next move the XY table until the dial indicator is over the front left (FL)
corner mark Figure 401 Measure and record the difference (e.g. the dial
indicator reads 0.004 in.)
9. Move the XY table until the dial indicator is over the front right (FR) corner mark Figure 401 Measure and record the difference (e.g. the dial
indicator reads +0.010 in.).
10. Move XY table until the dial indicator is over the back right (BR) corner
mark Figure 401 Measure and record the difference (e.g. the dial indicator reads +0.008 in).
11. Enter the values that are written down into the XY level worksheet. Use
the 8x6 worksheet for HP Designjet 3D, see Figure 402. Use the 8x8
worksheet for HP Designjet Color 3D, see Figure 403.

-387

Figure 402: HP Designjet 3D measurement points and worksheet

BL

BR

FL

FR

-388

Figure 403: HP Designjet Color 3D measurement points and worksheet

BL

BR

FL

FR

-389

Adjusting the XY Table Level


1.

Loosen the left front (LF), right front (RF) and back right (BR) guide rod
mounting screws.
NOTE: The back left (BL) corner does not have an adjustment gap
and will not require adjustment.

2. Move the indicator to the back left (BL) corner mark and verify gauge
reading is still zero
3. Move the indicator over the front left (FL) corner mark.
4. Set the gauge to zero by turing the outer ring of the gauge.
5. Position the table level adjustment tool on front left Y guide rod as shown
in Figure 404 Note that the adjustment tool prong must rest on the sheet
metal shelf.
Figure 404: Y guide rod adjustment location

6. Using the table leveling adjustment tool, move the rod up until the dial
indicator reading matches the value from the calculator. (e.g. 0.014)
7.

While holding the rod in position, tighten the front left (FL) guide rod
screw.

8. Move the dial indicator to the front right (FR) corner mark.
9. Set the gauge to zero by turing the outer ring of the gauge.
10. Position the table level adjustment tool on front right Y guide rod. Note
that the adjustment tool prong must rest on the sheet metal shelf.
11. Using the table leveling adjustment tool move the rod up until the dial
indicator reading matches the value from the calculator. (e.g. -0.013).
12. While holding the rod in position, tighten the front right (FR) guide rod
screw.
13. Move the dial indicator to the back right (BR) corner mark.
14. Set the gauge to zero by turing the outer ring of the gauge.

-390

15. Using the table leveling adjustment tool move the rod up until the dial
indicator reading matches the value from the calculator. (e.g. -0.001).
16. While holding the rod in position, tighten the back right (BR) guide rod
screw
17. Recheck the four corners by moving the gauge over the corner marks.
The maximum difference allowed between the highest and lowest readings is 0.003 in.
18. Repeat the XY leveling process until the measurements are within specification.

-391

Head Alignment Procedure


This procedure is used verify and correct head alignments when
misalignment is suspected.
NOTE: This procedure must be accomplished in its entirety and in
the order presented. The procedure consists of 3 procedures: Drive
wheel alignment, Idler Wheel adjustment and Liquefier alignment.
Figure 405: Special Head Alignment Tools

Spring removal tool

Drive wheel
alignment rod

Liquifier
alignment rod

Shim set

Drive Wheel Alignment


This procedure axially aligns the Head Motor Drive Wheel with the filament
path.
1.

Remove the Pivot Block Spring using spring removal tool. See Figure 406
Figure 406: Pivot block spring location

Pivot Block Spring


Tool

2. Remove the right side Pivot Block.


Remove the retaining clip and teflon washer from the right side Pivot
Block Pin.
3. Move the Toggle Bar to the right.
4. Loosen (dont remove) the model side Heater Block Mount screws and
the model side Heater Block Clamp screws

-392

5. Make sure that the Drive Wheel Alignment Rod is straight. Roll the Rod
along a flat surface to check for bends. Straighten as necessary.
6. Insert the Drive Wheel Alignment Rod from the bottom of the right side
(model) heater block (before using, check the rod to make sure that it is
straight).
7. Push the Alignment Rod up into the Main Pivot Block.
8. Position the Alignment Rod so that the stepped portion is centered
between the Heater Block and the Pivot Block. See Fig. 407
9. Tighten the Heater Block Clamp screws.
10. Tighten the Heater Block Mount screws.
Figure 407: Drive wheel alignment
Toggle Bar to
right.Alignment Pin
inserted so step is
visible.
Drive Wheel
set screw
Toggle Bar to left.
Drive Wheel is
positioned so that
Alignment Pin is
centered in Wheel
track.

Heater Block Clamp


Screws

Heater Block Mount


Screws

11. With the Drive Wheel set screw loose (make sure that the Drive Wheel is
free to slide axially on the Motor shaft), gently move the Toggle Bar to
the left until the Alignment Rod rests in the groove of the Drive Wheel.
NOTE: Do not force the Toggle Bar to the full left position. Forcing
the Toggle Bar to the full left position may cause the Alignment Rod
to bend.
12. Adjust the Drive Wheel until the Alignment Rod is centered in the groove
of the Drive Wheel.
13. Tighten the Drive Wheel set screw.
14. Verify proper Drive Wheel alignment:
A. Gently move the Toggle Bar to the right, then back to the
left while observing the Drive Wheel and Alignment Pin.

View the alignment of the Drive Wheel and Alignment Pin from
the right side of the system.

-393

Figure 408: Viewing the drive wheel alignment

B. The Alignment Pin should not deflect forward or backward


as the Drive Wheel is brought into contact with the Pin.
C. The Alignment Pin should be centered within the groove of
the Drive Wheel.

Drive wheel must be axially aligned along the centerline between the model
liquefier heater blocks and the main toggle block within .0025".

D. If the Alignment Pin is misaligned, repeat steps 11 through


14.
Figure 409: Wheel alignment check 1 of 2
Drive Wheel

As the Toggle Bar is moved right and left,


the Alignment Pin should not deflect fore or
aft as the Drive Wheel contacts the Pin.

Alignment Pin

-394

Figure 410: Wheel alignment check 2 of 2

5. Move the Toggle Bar to the right.


6. Loosen the Heater Block Clamp screws and the Heater Block Mount
screws.
7. Remove the Alignment Rod.
8. Install the right side Pivot Block.
a. Make sure the Shim is installed (it normally remains on the pin when
the Pivot Block is removed).
b. Install the teflon washer and retaining clip.
Idler Wheel Check/Adjustment
This procedure adjusts the amount of tension that the Idler Wheels apply to
the filament.
1.

Rotate the Drive Wheel so that the set screw head is on the bottom of the
Wheel (Figure 411).

2. Check/Adjust the Right (Model) side Idler Wheel clearance: (Figure 411)
A. Place the Toggle Bar in the full Left position.
B. Check the clearance between the Drive Wheel and the
Idler Wheel - a .003 inch feeler gauge (shim stock) should
have a light drag when placed between the Drive Wheel
and the Idler Wheel.
C. Place the Toggle Bar in the Neutral position (half way
between full Left and full Right).
D. Insert a .005 inch feeler gauge between the Drive Wheel
and the Idler Wheel.
E.

Return the Toggle Bar to the full Left position - the .005 inch
feeler gauge should be firmly held between the Drive
Wheel and the Idler Wheel.

-395

F.

If the tension is not correct remove the Idler Wheel Tension


Adjust screw (5/64 Allen), apply LocTite 222 to the screw
threads, and install the screw.

G. Adjust the screw to obtain a light drag on .003 inch feeler


gauge when it is positioned between the Drive Wheel and
the Idler Wheel.
H. Check the tension with the .005 inch feeler gauge as
above.
I.

Continue to adjust the screw until the prescribed tension is


obtained.

J.

When adjustment is complete, place the Toggle Bar in the


Neutral position, and remove all feeler gauges.

K. Place the Toggle Bar in the full Left position and spin the
Idler Wheel by hand. The Idler Wheel should spin freely
without drag. If drag is present, re-check adjustments.
Figure 411: Idler Wheel Adjustment - Right Side

Drive Wheel
rotated so set
screw head is on
the bottom.

Right side Idler


Wheel Tension
Adjust screw.

Use .003 inch and


.005 inch feeler
gauges (shim
stock) to check
clearance.

3. Check/Adjust the Left (Support) side Idler Wheel clearance: (Figure 412)
A. Move the Toggle Bar to the full Right position.
B. Check/Adjust the clearance between the Drive Wheel and
the Idler Wheel - a .003 inch feeler gauge (shim stock)
should have a light drag when placed between the Drive
Wheel and the Idler Wheel.
C. Place the Toggle Bar in the Neutral position.
D. Insert a .005 inch feeler gauge between the Drive Wheel
and the Idler Wheel.
E.

Return the Toggle Bar to the full Right position - the .005
inch feeler gauge should be firmly held between the Drive
Wheel and the Idler Wheel.

-396

F.

If the tension is not correct remove the Idler Wheel Tension


Adjust screw (5/64 Allen), apply LocTite 222 to the screw
threads, and install the screw.

G. Adjust the screw to obtain a light drag on .003 inch feeler


gauge when it is positioned between the Drive Wheel and
the Idler Wheel.
H. Check the tension with the .005 inch feeler gauge as
above.
I.

Continue to adjust the screw until the prescribed tension is


obtained.

J.

When adjustment is complete, place the Toggle Bar in the


Neutral position, and remove all feeler gauges.

K. Place the Toggle Bar in the full Right position and spin the
Idler Wheel by hand. The Idler Wheel should spin freely
without drag. If drag is present, re-check adjustments.
Figure 412: Idler Wheel Adjustment - Left Side
Left side Idler
Wheel Tension
Adjust screw.

For SST: Use .003 inch and .005


inch feeler gauges (shim stock)
to check clearance.

Liquefier Alignment
This aligns the Liquefier Tubes with the filament path.
1.

Right (Model) side:


A. Move the Toggle Bar to the full Right position.
B. Make sure the right side Heater Block Mount and Clamp
screws are loose.
C. Make sure that the Liquefier Alignment Rod is straight. Roll
the Rod along a flat surface to check for bends. Straighten
as necessary.
D. Insert the Liquefier Alignment Rod from the bottom of the
right side heater block - small end first.
E.

Push the Alignment Rod up into the Main Pivot Block.

-397

F.

Position the Liquefier Alignment Rod so that the stepped


portion is flush with the top of the Heater Block.

G. Tighten the Heater Block Clamp screws.


CAUTION: Use care when moving the Toggle Bar. Forcing the bar,
or applying too much pressure, will damage the Liquefier Alignment
Rod and cause a misalignment of the Liquefier Tubes with the
filament path.
H. Move the Toggle Bar to the full Left position.
I.

Tighten the lower Heater Block Mount screw until it is snug.

J.

Tighten the upper Heater Block Mount screw until it is snug.

K. Tighten the lower and upper Heater Block Mount screws to


final torque.
NOTE: Make sure that the Heater Block does not move while
tightening the mount screws.
L.

Move the Toggle Bar to the right until the Drive Wheel no
longer contacts the Liquefier Alignment Rod.

M. Loosen the Heater Block Clamp screws and remove the


Liquefier Alignment Rod.
2. Left (Support) side:
A. Repeat step 1 above - except reverse the Toggle Bar
positions.
Verify Liquefier Alignment
This procedure makes sure that the Liquefier Tubes are properly aligned with
the filament path. This procedure must be performed after Liquefier
Alignment on page397. is performed.
1.

Install the Heat Shield - install and tighten the 2 retaining screws - make
sure the teflon washers are installed between the Heat Shield tabs and
the Translator.

2. Install the new Liquefier Tips (Figure 413)


A. You must identify the correct replacement tip. The uPrint
uses two tip types. You must make sure a SUPPORT tip is
used on the LEFT side of the head assembly. A MODEL tip
must be used on the RIGHT side of the head assembly. The
Model tip comes in a Red capped container. The Support
tip comes in a Black capped container.
CAUTION: Model and SOLUBLE support tips are different. The
correct tip must be installed in the correct side.

-398

Figure 413: Identifying tips

B. Insert the new tip into the heater block.


C. Use needle nose pliers to grasp the stainless steel shield of
the tip.
D. Pull the tip shield toward you, then lift up to install the tip.
E.

Push the tip toward the back of the printer once it is all the
way up against the heater block.

F.

Verify the tip is fully inserted into the heater block and that
the stainless steel shield is aligned.

NOTE: Make sure Tip remains all the way up against the heater
block as you tighten the screws.
Figure 414: Tip stainless steel shield alignment

G. Use 7/64 T-Handle Allen wrench to firmly tighten the


heater block clamp screws.
H. Repeat step 2 for second tip.
3. Verify Right (Model) side alignment:
A. Move the Toggle Bar to the full Right position.

-399

B. Make sure that the Liquefier Alignment Rod is straight. Roll


the Rod along a flat surface to check for bends. Straighten
as necessary.
C. Insert the Liquefier Alignment Rod - small end first - from the
TOP of the right side Toggle Block, past the Drive Wheel, to
just above the Liquefier inlet.
D. Move the Toggle Bar to the full Left position.
E.

Visually check (view from the front of the system) the


alignment of the Alignment Rod with the Liquefier inlet tube.

Liquefier inlet must be aligned with the toggle head pinch point +/0.0065". (The pinch point is the same as the centerline of the Alignment
Rod.)
If the Support Filament Guide interferes with the Alignment Rod, recheck

Liquefier Alignment on page397..


F.

Perform a physical check of the alignment by pushing down


on the top of the Alignment Rod so that it enters the inlet of
the Liquefier. Alignment is not correct if additional pressure
is required on the Rod as it enters the inlet - the pressure
required to move the Rod should be consistent throughout
its travel.

4. Verify Left (Support) side alignment:


A. Repeat steps 1-3 above - except reverse the Toggle Bar
positions.
Figure 415: Liquefier alignment check (1 of 2)

-400

Figure 416: Liquefier alignment check (2 of 2)

Unacceptable liquefier
alignment
Pinch point is the same
as the centerline of the
alignment rod.

Complete the Re-Assembly of the Toggle Head Assembly


1.

Connect the Filament Tubes to the top of the Toggle Head Assembly make sure the model tube is on the right; the support tube on the left.

2. Install the Air Plenum - connect the Plenum to the air duct at top - press in
on clips to fit the plenum to the Translator.
3. Install the Head Cover - squeeze the side tabs to fit the Translator.
4. Power the printer up.
5. From the display panel, press Maintenance > System > Tips and perform
the following calibrations:
A. Z calibration
B. XY Tip offset calibration.
NOTE: Follow the Head Installation Checklist after completing
Toggle Plate Assembly replacement.

-401

Tip wipe assembly


If the XY Table or Z stage has been replaced or leveled, the tip wipe
assembly will need to be adjusted to ensure proper functionality.

Required Tools

Standard screwdriver
7/64 allen wrench
Tip wipe height block

Adjusting tip wipe assembly height:


1.

Remove tip wipe assembly by pulling out of tip wipe bracket. See Figure
417

2. Remove the plastic screw caps by prying apart with a standard screwdriver. See Figure 417
Figure 417: Tip wipe assembly location

3. Insert the tip wipe assembly height block into the tip wipe assembly
bracket. See Figure 418
Figure 418: Tip wipe assembly height block

-402

4. Move the toggle bar to the model side, then move the toggle assembly
over the tip wipe height block. See Figure 419
Figure 419: Toggle assembly location

5. Using a 7/64 allen wrench, loosen but do not remove the tip wipe
assembly bracket screws. See Figure 420
Figure 420: Tip wipe assembly bracket screw locations

6. Slowly position the tip wipe assembly bracket upwards so tip wipe
assembly height block touches the model and support tips. See Figure
421

-403

Figure 421: Tip wipe assembly bracket adjustment

7.

Using a 7/64 allen wrench, tighten the tip wipe assembly bracket
screws.

8. Slowly move the toggle assembly away from the tip wipe assembly
height block.
9. Position the plastic screw caps over the tip wipe assembly bracket screws
and press into place.
10. Reinstall the tip wipe assembly into the tip wipe assembly bracket.

-404

Appendix
Appendix Overview
The appendix contains the following types of documents:

Illustrated parts breakdown


Checklists
HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software
Tera Term

Front door area components................................................... page 406


Electronics bay components.................................................... page 407
Head area components ......................................................... page 409
XY Table area components...................................................... page 413
Z Stage area components ....................................................... page 415
Chamber heater area components .......................................... page 416
Cables ................................................................................ page 417
Material Bay Components ...................................................... page 418
Tools ................................................................................... page 419
Consumables ....................................................................... page 419
Hard Drive Installation Checklist.............................................. page 420
Toggle Head Assembly Installation Checklist............................. page 421
XY Table Assembly Installation Checklist................................... page 422
Controller Board Checklist...................................................... page 423
HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software Help............................... page 424
Tera Term............................................................................. page 431

-405

Front door area components


Figure 422: Front door area component locations
5
1

2
7
3

8
4

10

Item

Part Number

Description

Qty

CQ656-67130

LCD Display

CQ656-67113

Panel, Left Side

Not Shown CQ656-67117

Insulation Foam, Left Panel

Panel, Front

Not Shown CQ656-67119

Insulation Foam, Front Panel

CQ656-67115

Panel, Door

CQ656-67112

Panel, Top

Not Shown CQ656-67116

Insulation Foam, Top Panel

Panel, Right Side

CQ656-67111

CQ656-67114

Not Shown CQ656-67118

Insulation Foam, Right Panel

CQ656-67120

Glass Door Assembly

CQ656-67124

Door Solenoid

CQ656-67125

Door Sensor

Not Shown CQ656-67126

Door Solenoid/Sensor Holder

10

Foot, Vibration Mount

Display Access Door

CQ656-67129

Not Shown CQ656-67121

-406

Electronics bay components


Figure 423: Electronics bay component locations
1
9

Item

Part Number

Description

Qty

1
2

CQ656-67177

I/O Card

CQ656-67176

Power Distribution Board (PDB)

CQ656-67178

Controller Board

CQ656-67179

Single Board Computer (SBC)

CQ656-67184

Differential Line Filter

CQ656-67185

AC Input

CQ656-67141

Circuit Breaker

CQ656-67186

Electronics Bay Cooling Fan

CQ656-67180

Hard Drive with Software

-407

Figure 424: Electronics bay component locations

-408

Item

Part Number

Description

Qty

CQ656-67181

120 VDC Auxiliary Power Supply

CQ656-67182

24 VDC Power Supply

CQ656-67183

5/12 VDC Power Supply

Head area components


Figure 425: Head area components

Item

Part Number

Description

Qty

CQ656-67159

Toggle Head Cover

CQ656-67158

Toggle Head Manifold

Not Shown CQ656-67195

Tip Shroud

Not Shown CQ656-67196

T16 Model Liquefier

Not Shown CQ656-67197

T16 Support Liquefier

-409

Figure 426: Head area components


2

-410

Item

Part Number

Description

Qty

CQ656-67149

Toggle Head Assembly

CQ656-67148

Filament tube, Support

CQ656-67147

Filament tube, Model

Figure 427: Head area component locations

Item

Part Number

Description

Qty

CQ656-67150

Head Board

CQ656-67153

Toggle Bar

CQ656-67151

TC Amp Board

-411

Figure 428: Head area component locations

-412

Item

Part Number

Description

Qty

CQ656-67154

Toggle Sensor Cable

CQ656-67152

Toggle Sensor

CQ656-67155

Substrate Sensor

CQ656-67156

Substrate Sensor Arm

XY Table area components


Figure 429: XY Table component locations

1
2
7

Item

Part Number

Description

QTY

1
2

CQ656-67157

Umbilical Hose

CQ656-67193

Umbilical Cable

CQ656-67147

Model Material Tube

CQ656-67131

Y Motor

CQ656-67132

X Motor

CQ656-67137

Y Motor Belt

CQ656-67148

Support Material Tube

-413

Figure 430: XY Table component locations

Item

Part Number

Description

Qty

CQ656-67134

XY Table

Not Shown

CQ656-67135

X Drive Belt

Not Shown

CQ656-67136

Y Drive Belt

Figure 431: XY Table component locations

-414

Item

Part Number

Description

Qty

CQ656-67122

Y Home sensor

CQ656-67122

Y EOT (End of Travel) Sensor

Z Stage area components


Figure 432: Z Stage component locations
8
1

2
3

Item

Part Number

Description

Qty

CQ656-67122

Z Home Sensor

CQ656-67194

Chamber Thermocouple, K-type 36 inch

CQ656-67122

Z EOT (End of Travel) Sensor

CQ656-67142

Chamber Fan

5a

CQ656-67138

Z Stage 8x6

5b

CQ656-67139

Z Stage 8x8

CQ656-67133

Z motor, leadscrew and energy chain

CQ656-67110

Purge Bucket

CQ656-67198

Tip Wipe assembly

LED Light Bar

Not Shown CQ656-67128

-415

Chamber heater area components


Figure 433: Chamber heater area components

-416

Item

Part Number

Description

Qty

CQ656-67143

Heater, Finned Strip

CQ656-67146

Thermostat, 121 DEG C Disc

Cables
Part Number

Description

Qty

CQ656-67161

Cable, 120 Volt Auxiliary Power

CQ656-67162

Cable, UPS to PDB

CQ656-67163

Cable, RS232 Diagnostic

CQ656-67164

Cable, Ribbon, SBC to PDB

CQ656-67165

Cable, AC to PDB and Power Supplies

CQ656-67213

Cable, +24VDC to PDB and Fan

CQ656-67166

Cable, +5/12 VDC Power

CQ656-67167

Cable, Line Filter Input

CQ656-67168

Cable, Line Filter to Circuit Breaker

CQ656-67169

Cable, Panel Ground

CQ656-67170

Cable, Controller to PDB, 50-pos

CQ656-67171

Cable, Controller to PDB, 20-pos

CQ656-67173

Cable, Communication, RJ45, 3 ft.

CQ656-67174

Cable, Inline RJ45

CQ656-67175

Cable, Material Bay Communication, Power, Internal

CQ656-67187

Cable, Chamber Heater

CQ656-67188

Cable, X-axis Stepper (with energy chain)

CQ656-67189

Cable, Lower Harness

CQ656-67190

Cable, Upper Harness

CQ656-67191

Cable, Y Limit Sensors

CQ656-67192

Cable, Controlled Off, Thermostat

CQ656-67193

Cable, Umbilical

CQ656-67194

Cable, Thermocouple, K-Type 36

CQ656-67109

Cable, Material Bay to Modeler

-417

Material Bay Components


Figure 434: Material Bay components

5
4

6
7
8
9

-418

Item

Part number

Description

Qty.

CQ656-67103 Door, Support Side

CQ656-67102 Door, Model Side

CQ656-67104 Skins, Left or Right Side

CQ656-67101 Material Bay Assembly

CQ656-67109 Material Bay Cable

CQ656-67107 Model Material Tube, dual bay

CQ656-67105 Model Material Tube, single bay

CQ656-67108 Support Material Tube, dual bay

CQ656-67106 Support Material Tube, single bay

Not Shown CQ656-67199 Model Material Suitcase (Red Handle)

Not Shown CQ656-67200 Support Material Suitcase (Black Handle)

Not Shown CQ656-67201 Suitcase Storage Bag

Tools
Part Number

Description

Qty

CQ656-67202

Special Tools Kit

CQ656-67203

Head Alignment Tool Kit

CQ656-67205

Spring Removal Tool

CQ656-67206

Belt Tension Gauge

CQ656-67207

Head Bracket

CQ656-67208

Brush/Flicker Spacer

Consumables
Part Number

Description

Qty

CQ656-67214

P430L Ivory, Single Spool, 40cu in

CQ656-67215

P430L Red, Single Spool, 40cu in

CQ656-67216

P430L Green, Single Spool, 40cu in

CQ656-67217

P430L Black, Single Spool, 40cu in

CQ656-67218

P430L Yellow, Single Spool, 40cu in

CQ656-67219

P430L Blue, Single Spool, 40cu in

CQ656-67220

P430L Gray, Single Spool, 40cu in

CQ656-67221

P430L Orange, Single Spool, 40cu in

CQ656-67222

SR30L Support, Single Spool, 40cu in

CQ656-67223

SR30 Tip Kit, Model and Support Tips, 4 Tip Wipes, 8


Tip Shields

-419

Hard Drive Installation Checklist








Replace the hard drive.


Verify that all cables are connected correctly.
Clean and vacuum the system.
Power system up.
After 10 minutes to 45 minutes, the LCD will display UPGRADE and
Send Upgrade From Work Station along with the Dynamic IP Address
of the system (the default system setting).
NOTE: For convenience, the assigned IP address is visible in the
display panel during this process.

If the system will be operating in a Dynamic environment, the UPGRADE


can be loaded from the PC.

 Use the Manage 3D Printers button in HP Designjet Software Solution to


connect to the printer -Choose Add from Network...

If the system will be operating in a Static environment, choose Set Network... from the display panel and enter the appropriate network

addresses. The customer should provide this information.

 After all the addresses have been edited, select Done.


 Use the Manage 3D Printers button in HP Designjet Software Solution to
connect to the printer - Choose Add Manually...

NOTE: The printer firmware must be downloaded before system


operation can continue.

 Download the printer firmware using the most current version. Download
instructions for performing the download procedure are located on the
firmware CD.
Once download is complete, system will reach Idle.


 Load material.
 Run a small test part to ensure part quality is acceptable and that the
system is operating properly.

-420

Toggle Head Assembly Installation


Checklist
If you have any questions before or during installation, do not hesitate to call
your Customer Support provider.







Replace the Toggle Head Assembly.


Verify that all electrical leads are connected correctly.
Clean and vacuum the system.
Power system up and verify that head reaches temperature and the
system homes correctly.
Using DataStat or HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software enter the Z Tip
to Tip value that came with the head and cycle power.
Load material.


 Perform the Z Calibration and XY Offset Calibration.
 Run a part to ensure part quality is acceptable and that head is
functioning correctly.

-421

XY Table Assembly Installation Checklist


If you have any questions before or during installation, do not hesitate to call
your Customer Support provider.














-422

Replace the XY table Assembly.


Verify that all electrical leads are connected correctly
Perform the XY Leveling procedure
Check/Adjust the X-Drive Belt tension
Check/Adjust the Y-Drive Belt tension
Manually move the table in both the X and Y direction to ensure it moves
smoothly.
Clean and vacuum the system.
Power system up and verify that system homes correctly.
Load material.
Perform the Part Based Calibration procedure.
Perform the Z Calibration and XY Offset Calibration.
Run a small test part to ensure part quality is acceptable and that the XY
table is functioning correctly.

Controller Board Checklist


Use this checklist when replacing the controller board. Due to possible
software version conflicts, additional steps must be taken after installing a
controller board - the complete (X, Y, Z) homing process must be run before
building a part.








Unload material.
Power down the system.
Replace the controller board.
Power up the system
When prompted, download the printer firmware.
Enter Head Maintenance. This will cause the system to run the complete
homing process.
Exit Head Maintenance


 Load material.
 Run a small test part to ensure part quality is acceptable and that the XY
table is functioning correctly.

-423

HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software


Help
Overview
HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software is a program used for printer
configuration and troubleshooting. It is intended for use by trained service
personnel only.
CAUTION: It is possible, using this program, to damage the printer
firmware and make the printer non-functional.
Using HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software you can select a modeler to
work with, modify printer-specific configuration parameters, download new
calibration file data, download new test parts, and test the printer's
operation.

Select a Modeler
Modeler States
Modeler Setup
HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software Configuration
Show Printer Status
Materials
Tip Offset and Liquefier Calibration
Gantry
Temperatures
Outputs
Table Calibration
Get Calibration
Send Calibration
Get Configuration
Test Parts
Reset Password
Connect

Select a Modeler
From the Current Modeler drop down list select a modeler to connect to with
HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software. To add modelers to the list, use the
plus

button at the bottom of the window.

-424

Modeler States
These three fields provide the current information for the state of the printer:
State

The current printer state as reported to HP Designjet 3D Software


Solution status.

Internal State

The current internal software state (e.g. sttIdle)

Home State

If present, the previous internal state to which the current state will
return when complete.

Modeler Setup
In order to use HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software on a network modeler,
you must first create a modeler definition. You can create modeler definitions
by clicking the

button in the main window.

A modeler definition is made complete by specifying the following:

Modeler name (You can use any descriptive name for the modeler.)
Modeler type
Modeler IP address

You can delete a modeler definition by selecting the

button in the main

window and then choosing the modeler to delete from the current list of
modelers.

Display Units
Select the display units by clicking the Display Units drop down list and
selecting your preferred units. You can choose to display units in inches or
millimeters. The default display unit is inches.

Printer Status
HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software printer status provides the ability to set
the machines serial number and detailed information about the current
mechanical state of the printer.

Position and Temperatures


Versions
Travel Limits
Material
Door
Setting the Serial Number

-425

Position and Temperatures


Current Position

The current X, Y and Z position in micro steps.


X and Y = 16000 micro-steps per inch.
Z = 128000 micro-steps per inch.

Current / Total
Layers

The current build layer and the total number of layers in


the model

Current Curve

The current curve (toolpath) number of the model

Current Vertex

The current vertex (series of connected points) number of


the model.

Head Temp

The actual head temperature and its set point in C.

Head PWM

The pulse width modulation value 0 = off / 255 = 100%

Support Temp

The support liquefier temperature and its set point in C.

Support PWM

The pulse width modulation value 0 = off / 255 = 100%

Chamber Temp

The actual chamber temperature and its set point in C.

Versions
Product Version

The current version number for the complete


firmware release

Build Version

The build number for current firmware

Firmware Version

The current version for the firmware.

PLD Version

The current version of the programmable logic


devices on the controller board.

Product serial
number

The serial number of the complete system.

Travel Limits
If the box is checked the switch is tripped. NOTE: It is suggested, that due to
the time required to display switch state changes, that you use the LEDs on
the PDB to verify switch operations.
X home

The X axis home limit switch state

X Limit

The X axis end of travel limit switch state

Y Home

The Y axis home limit switch state

Y Limit

The Y axis end of travel limit switch state

Z Home

The Z axis home limit switch state

Z Limit

The Z axis end of travel limit switch state

Z Jam

The Z jam encoder switch state

Z Foam

The Z top of foam switch state.

-426

Material
Model Latched

The model material cartridge latch state

Model in Head

The state of the modeling material in the printer.


True = material moved out of cartridge
False = material not moved out of cartridge.

Support Latched

The support material cartridge latch state.

Support in Head

The state of the support material in the printer.


True = material moved out of the cartridge.
False = material not moved out of the cartridge

Door
Door Latched

The state of the door latch solenoid

Door Open

The state of the door switch

Setting the Serial Number


To set the printer serial number enter the serial number in the "Product Serial
Number" field and click on the green check mark. The serial number
displayed in this field is the current serial number of the product.

Materials
Every spool has a SmartSpool EEPROM attached that tracks information
about the material remaining on the spool. The following information is
provided for each spool:
Serial Number

This is a unique number assigned to each spool.

Material Type

This is the type of material on the spool.


For example:
P430 - is a standard modeling material
SR30 - is a standard soluble release material.

Manufacturing Lot

This is a lot code used by Stratasys to control the


manufacturing process.

Manufacturing Date

This is the date that the spool was manufactured.

Use Date

This is the date that the spool was first inserted in


a printer.

Initial Quantity

This is the amount of material that was on the


spool initially.

Current Quantity

This is the amount of material currently on the


spool.

Adjusting XY Tip Offset


See Offset Calibrations on page 338.

-427

Gantry
The gantry controls the adjustment for the XY gantry. These values are set in
the factory and do not need to be adjusted unless the XY gantry is adjusted
or replaced where part based calibration is required. See Part Based
Calibration on page 343.

Temperatures
The temperature control dialog allows you to adjust the set points for the
head and chamber temperatures, for both modeling and at standby. These
are set at the factory and should only be changed if noted to be incorrect.
Temperature

Building Set Point

Standby Set Point

Head

310C

100C

Support

310C

100C

Chamber

77C

77C

Temperature Limits
Temperature

Min.

Max

Head

89.5

333

Support

89.5

333

Chamber

40

77

-428

Outputs
The outputs dialog contains toggle buttons to control solenoids and motors
that can not be directly controlled on the Control Panel Display. NOTE: It is
suggested, that due to the time required to display switch state changes, that
you use the LEDs on the PDB to verify switch operations.
Model Latch

The check box shows the state of the model (top)


cartridge latch. Checking or unchecking the toggle
button enables or disables the latch.

Motor Enabled

The check button shows the state of the model (top)


feed motor solenoid. Checking or unchecking the
toggle button enables or disables the solenoid.

Motor Running

The check box shows the state of the model (top)


filament feed motor. Checking or unchecking the
toggle button enables or disables the motor.

Support Latched

The check box shows the state of the support


(bottom) cartridge latch. Checking or unchecking the
toggle button enables or disables the latch.

Motor Enabled

The check box shows the state of the support


(bottom) feed motor solenoid. Checking or
unchecking the toggle button enables or disables the
solenoid.

Motor Running

The check box shows that state of the support


(bottom) filament feed motor. Checking or
unchecking the toggle button enables or disables the
motor.

Door Latch

This check box shows the state of the door latch


solenoid. Checking or unchecking the toggle button
enables or disables the latch.

Lights On

This check box shows the state of the chamber lights.


Checking or unchecking the toggle button enables
or disables the lights.

Get Calibration
The Get Calibration button allows a single calibration file to be retrieved
from any printer. This calibration file will also be on the printer Frame ID
chip. This file contains all the factory calibration information, including, but
not limited to: Tip Offset, Tip Depth, Y Lash, X Correction, and the table
calibration .DAT file.
When the button is pressed, a file selection dialog is presented allowing the
assignment of a file name and the selection of a storage location. This file
should be updated any time maintenance is performed that affects the
factory calibration.

-429

Send Calibration
The Send Calibration button allows you to send the complete set of factory
calibrations to the printer as a single file. This includes but is not limited to:
Tip Offset, Tip Depth, YLash, X Correction, and the gantry DAT file. A
calibration file can be retrieved from the modeler using Get Calibration.
When this button is pressed a dialog box appears that allows you to browse
for and select the calibration file to send to the printer.

Get Configuration
Clicking the Get Config button will download the configuration file from the
printer.

Test Parts
Test Parts consists of downloading sample and test part files to the printer.
The files must be in the .cmb.gz format produced by HP Designjet 3D
Software Solution.
The Test Part dialog allows you to browse for and select the sample or test
file and to download it to the printer. The Test Parts are not preserved during
a software upgrade.
To remove unwanted test parts, upgrade the software to the current level and
only the factory test parts will remain on the system.

Reset Password
This button resets the administrator password to null. This turns off password
control of the queue. This is used for clearing a forgotten password.

Connect
If the system is not available over the network, when HP Designjet 3D
Diagnostic Software first loads, HP Designjet 3D Diagnostic Software will
only try to connect one time. This allows you to interact with HP Designjet 3D
Diagnostic Software when it is not connected to a printer. The Connect
button allows you to request additional connection attempts.

-430

Tera Term
Using Tera Term
When using these commands, there is a high risk of damage to the machine
because the printer does not recognize the location of any other components
in the machine that may be in the way. This means if you use the command
to move the Z-Stage, you will have to make sure that the Head is moved out
of the way. The same if you want to move the X-Y axis. The Z-Stage has to be
moved out of the way. The printer does see the EOT switches and the Home
Sensors.

Required Tools

Tera Term software installed on workstation or lap top computer.


NOTE: Version 4.71 is used for these instructions, other version
may function differently.

Null modem cable (Laplink) with DB9 style connectors, pins 2 and
3 swapped .
NOTE: If your computer does not have a serial port, connect
through a quality USB to serial converter. We recommend the
IOGEAR GUC232A.

Computer with Windows XP , Windows Vista or Windows 7.

Connecting with Tera Term


1.

Verify printer is powered ON.

2. Connect the Null modem cable or USB to serial converter cable from the
computer to the printer serial port connector.
3. Open Tera Term:

4. Once Tera Term is started the New Connection Window will come up,
see Figure 435 If the New Connection window does not open, click File
> New Connection.

-431

Figure 435: New Connection Window

5. Select the Serial radio button, see Figure 436


6. From the Port: pull-down menu select the COM port that the USB to
serial converter is connected to,see Figure 436
Figure 436: New Connection Settings

7.

Click OK.

8. Click on Setup > Serial Port, see Figure 437

-432

Figure 437: Setup Serial Port

9. From the Baud Rate: pull-down menu select 38400, see Figure 438
10. From the Flow Control: pull-down menu select hardware, see Figure
438
11. The rest of the settings should default to the correct values. Click OK, see
Figure 438
Figure 438: Serial Port Setup

12. The connection should now be established.


A. To test the connection, type ss and press the Enter key.
"Information should post on the screen if the connection
was successful.
NOTE: "If text does not appear in Tera Term you may have the
wrong COM Port selected, there may be an issue with the Null
Modem Cable or there may be an issue with the USB to serial
converter.

-433

Tera Term Commands


Tera Term is an easy way to check and troubleshoot the hardware of a
machine. Here are a couple of helpful commands which can be used to
operate the machine through Tera Term. All values, which are displayed in
Tera Term, are in inches. For some commands, the machine must find Home
position before you can enter commands.
NOTE: For a list of commands type help and press Enter.
Type help (space) command and press Enter for command
information.
Example = help fh
1.

trace c commandDetails on

This command enables the printer information to be displayed in the Tera


Term window.
2. fh = Find Home.
This command determines the XY axis home position. It locates the X and Y
axis limit switches, sets the origin, and places the head over the purge
bucket.
Used for testing X/Y limit sensors. During boot-up process; a bad sensor
could leave the machine stuck in initializing, fh will help find the right
sensor.
Example= fh
Figure 439

The values which are displayed are explained below, see


Figure 439: Find Home

Setting Gantry Type:

During the home sequence, the machine is also looking


at which table is installed in the machine (cable drive or
Belt drive). GR5K means, the Gear Ratio is 5000
microsteps/inch.

-434

Actual Travel Limits:

This is the distance between the BOT (Begin Of Travel)


and EOT (End Of Travel) Sensors in inches.

Set origin to:

This gives an offset to the BOT sensors so the machine is


not moving into the sensors during a build.

3. fz = Find Z home
This command determines the Z axis home position. This position is
determined by the modeling base that is installed in the system. The find
home command must be executed before this command will work.
Used to check for obstructions causing Z sensor errors. Also good for
checking the Z foam sensor touch down points ( Z stage going bad).
Example: fz
Figure 440

The values, which are displayed, are explained below, see


Figure 440: Find Z Home

Surface at touch point:

This is the distance in inches from the surface of the


substrate to the Z BOT sensor.

-435

Average surface:

This is the Average distance in inches between the substrate and the Z BOT sensor. The machine is looking
for the planarity of the substrate, if the substrate is not
flat, then the machine will not home.

Lowest surface:

This is the lowest distance in inches between the substrate and the Z BOT sensor.
SR64K type Z-Stage detected means, that the Z-Stage
has a Gear Ratio of 64000 microsteps per inch. This
indicates either a three leadscrew Z-Stage or a single
leadscrew Z-Stage.

4. ss = Switch Status
The ss diagnostic message reports system status. The controller outputs a
report on optical and mechanical switches to the terminal window.
Use this for checking:

Printer Gender (sent either wrong system software or .CAL file to


printer).
Motor gear ratio (if the system does not home correctly, the gear
ratio could be changed from cable table to belt table).
Head temp set point (with MaracaEX you can change the temp to
not match system software specification, causing errors).
System Software version check.
Figure 441: Switch status

-436

5. gp = get POST. Displays power on self test results


Use this for checking:

If the controller board passes the power on self test and to see the
reason for the last reset.
For the reason a new hard drive will not boot. The main problem is
the voltage checking process will have a voltage fail during POST;
this prevents the hard drive from booting.
Verify all voltages are ok.
Figure 442: Get POST

-437

6. rt = repeat
This command will tell the machine to repeat the previous command. The
command line takes a repeat count, and flags whether or not to ignore
errors. It also flags wether or not to show the command line of the command
to be run. The command line consists of one or more commands separated
by semicolons. The entire command line must be enclosed within double
quotes. Each command within the command line consists of a name and its
parameters. The command line is run until the iteration count is reached or
an error occurs. For each iteration, each command within the command line
is run in the order in which it appears.

The command RT 1000 0 tm will help troubleshoot temperature


issues in maintenance mode only.
The command RT 100 0 fh or RT 100 0 fz will help verify any X/Y/Z
sensors that had issues before the repair are tested and operational.

Parameters:
signed integer count

This parameter specifies the number of times the


command is to be run.

signed integer ignoreErrors

This parameter specifies whether errors should be


ignored. A value of zero causes the test to stop
when an is encountered A value of one causes
the test to run for the full count even when errors
occur.

string commandLine

This parameter contains the command line of the


command to be run enclosed within double
quotes. A commandline includes the name of the
command followed by it's parameters.

Example: rt 20 1 tm
Figure 443: Repeat

-438

7.

le = load exception log

This command prints the contents of the exception log located in non-volatile
memory. This exception log contains a record of the most recent exceptions
that occurred within the controller. The exceptions are printed in
chronological order.
Use this command to get the history of system errors printed on the screen.
This works best to troubleshoot past error codes and see if they relate to the
current issue. Displays in chronological order.
Figure 444: Load exception

-439

8. tm = monitors temperatures
This command displays temperature information for the model Liquefier,
support liquefier, and chamber heater.
Use this command if you experience temperature problems with the head.
Check if the model and support temperature reach the set point and if the
temperature is stable once it reaches the set point temperature. Check if the
PWM value varies instead of switching on and off. If the PWM switches on
and off, then the T/C board might be the root cause. (see also 14:67 error in
the Troubleshooting Guide)
Used for troubleshooting TC errors. Enter maintenance mode with the head
at full temp and wiggle the umbilical cable to check for wire issue. Also to
check if the PWM works to system specifications (you should see a slow
change in PWM like 20 to 30 to 40 not 10 to 100).
The information is displayed on a single line in the following format:
MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS:
m <cur>/<set>/<pwm>/<ts> s <cur>/<set>/<pwm>/<ts> c
<cur>/<set>/<on/off>
Parameter

Description

<cur>

Current temperature

<set>

Current temperature setpoint

<pwm>

Pulse Width Modulation status

<ts>

Temperature setback (1 = Active, 0 = Inactive)

Model

Support

Chamber
Figure 445: Monitor temperatures

Examples:
Command

Description

tm

Single print of the current temperatures

tm 1

One line displaying temperatures updating every second

tm 0

Turns off temperature updating every second

rt XXXX 1
tm

Prints the temperature continually the number of times represented by XXXX

9. mz = Move Z

-440

The MZ command moves the Z-Stage relative to the current position. A


positive value moves the Z-Stage down. A negative value moves the Z-Stage
up.
Example: mz 4.0

This command will move the Z-Stage 4 inch down.

10. mx = move x
This command moves the head in the X axis.
Parameters:
Float Position:
This is the absolute position it moves to, in inches, when the
command is sent from the Console and in device units when the
command is sent through the DPM.
Example: mx 3.0
sensor)

(moves the X-Axis 3 inches away from the X-Home

11. my = move y
This command moves the head in the y axis.
Parameters:
Float Position:
This is the absolute position it moves to, in inches, when the
command is sent from the Console and in device units when the
command is sent through the DPM.
Example: my 3.0
sensor)

(moves the Y-Axis 3 inches away from the Y-Home

12. cl = chamber light


This command turns the chamber light on and off.
Example: cl 1
Parameters:
Command

Description

cl 0

Turns the light off

cl 1

Turns the light on

13. dl = door latch


This command controls the door latch solenoid. The door latch can be
opened or closed.
Example: dl 1
Parameters:
Command

Description

dl 0

Opens door latch

dl 1

Closes door latch

dl 2

Places controller in charge of door latch

-441

-442

You might also like